Home

ControlMatrix User`s Manual

Contents

1. 26 4 Getting Started ERR V4 0US September 2004 Page 1 MediaMatrix 22 ControlMatrix User s Guide Table of Contents 41 GO I Stan so cU MEE SE RENE UM 29 4 1 1 Have you got what it takes 29 4 1 2 Install Central EQuipme nts tu pao ursa tee Duo sa Dion ts 29 4 1 3 30 AA Install eee 30 4 1 5 Inital Power UJp quite e 32 4 1 6 Configure the 32 4 1 7 Running and Testing the View 33 4 1 8 Configure the Q FIOSL Pert ERU 33 4 1 9 Are ControlMatrix and MediaMatrix Working Together 34 4 1 10 Setting 2 a davai some tot ee tee doute mts 34 4 1 11 Setting the Zones Output Levels 20 2 2 0 2 0 000 40 0 1 6 35 4 1 12 Troubleshooting ControlNet Network Problems 35 4 2 Making ControlMatrix View 36 4 2 1 Control Matrix View File
2. eerte Re IR RH HN es 52 5 6 DIS Play Sign Manager READER 53 5 7 Telephone Paging Unit Manager 1 54 5 8 System Inputs Configuration Dialog e 56 SoA cT 57 5 8 2 Background tee eet eese te bende teque tu tet eques 58 5 8 3 User INDUS iu uds 58 SGP Local Inputs Poet RE REO EH 59 5 8 0 Telephone Inputs eec Mice co dou Hoc dpud ib i E 59 5 9 Zone Attributes Configuration Dialog ee 60 5 9 1 euet ER 61 5 9 2 SVC T obe pio oe Pp pa ero o 61 oce dead idoli bes LE LEG A 62 V4 0US September 2004 Page 2 MediaMatrix 22 ControlMatrix User s Guide Table of Contents 594 SCP AL LO ue 62 5 10 Alarm Manager ences eee SERRE RR 63 5 11 System Time Setup ett rtr prati RR 66 5 12 User MANAGER d EDD MEE EMI EMI 69 5 13 Files Menu RED 70 5 13 1 Save Configuration aan ooo oie ied poled sind sini olin oreo mde 72 5 13 2 Restore Gonflg
3. 150 9 5 Using PCU2 Paging Station 153 S RD Dog 153 RAMON Hab 153 9 6 Using a Paging Station 158 Beso pDHO S o ue esa decer CCS On M INE GIA RING E 158 9 6 2 o ei cans vane Cn PAGES 158 9 7 Using a PCU4 Paging 160 2 160 Sot sat 8815152 Nen epa De QU ES E DU DEDI NE DARREN 161 9 8 Using a PCUS Paging Station 166 98411 EE EIU E TERES ESCE ESEESE 166 9 522 ODER ALON e a ene pta Dua atte en eu het Dada Mo Costa a Deu a d E ose Leo a dud 166 9 9 Using an RMP1 Paging Microphone ee 171 9 9 1 DestFIDIHOE e pde nicks bred en o eb br ble bbb bei ue 171 9 9 2 171 9 10 Using Telephone Paging
4. 16 2 6 3 If the second paging event is higher priority than the first 17 2 7 System Alaris 17 3 ControlMatrix Elements desde e egit 20 941 Introduc UOont oo roD DR Eds DO AE RM 21 3 2 21 E E 21 3 2 2 Messaging and 21 3 2 3 MediaMathix 22 3 2 4 Central Equipment Hardware 22 3 3 Field a oaa iea a eaa eee ee aa Na 23 9 31 PAGING Stations lt 23 3 3 2 Telephone Paging 222000442 1 24 3 3 3 Wall Mount Controller tob croit rettet roce otra eoi a Ren t e e reas 24 3 3 4 PCU 2100 Load Sharing Redundant Power 25 24 25 2 9 25 3 5 1 ControlMatrix 26 3 5 2 gt
5. eet nt retenti 91 6 3 Outputs Dialog c ein 94 6 4 Scheduling Menu eere RR ee 95 6 4 1 Schedule Configuration 95 6 4 2 Schedule Preview Dialog ce retener et tex Hp EP 105 6 5 Message Manager senes ID eters 107 6 5 1 WAV Manager 2 2 rt ttt ete 107 6 5 2 ext ASSOCIALION PaliBr uio iue og em Hg een emu nU en aie aie 109 6 5 3 Preamble Selection 110 6 6 Courtesy Message Configuration 112 6 6 1 Courtesy Message 15 0000 00 112 6 6 2 Courtesy Text Attributes Redde 114 6 5 3 Courtesy Preview RIDE dub ceed 115 6 6 4 Courtesy Zone Selection 116 6 6 5 Saving the Courtesy 116 6 7 Diagnostics retta reete ra e area lena ERR area xx a 117 6 7 1 System Alarms Dialog eee nte ne b 117 ON MEC utere uec ccr TTC 118 V4 0US September 2004 Page 3 MediaMatrix 22 ControlMatrix User s Guide Table of Contents 6 9 Help Menu Scns enw erin eee 120 7 ControlMatrix Courtes 7 1 ControlMatrix Counesy 2 3 4 4 045 08a ee et a ee eee 123 7 1 1 Whatis Text to Speech T 1512 cccccescceve
6. Background Source for selection becomes MP3 Jukebox X Paging Zone Background Source Concourse MP3 Jukebox Lounge 14 Radio 4KQ Lounge 15 Radio 4KQ Lounge 16 Radio 4KQ Lounge 17 MP3 Tukebox Lounge Lounge 19 MP3 Tukebox Lounge Lounge Lounge 22 MP3 Jukebox Lounge Lounge Figure 6 7 Background Allocation Dialog To allocate a background to a group of paging zones first click on the Paging Zones tab Select zone names for the allocation from the Paging Zone list To select a range of zones select the first zone in the range then while holding down the Shift key select the last zone in the range To select multiple zones at random hold down the Ctrl key while making selections Once the zones have been selected select the desired background source from the drop down list Changes will not go live until the Apply button is clicked Clicking the Done button will have the same effect and will also close the dialog To discard any changes that have not yet been applied click the Cancel button This will also close the dialog V4 0US September 2004 Page 89 ControlMatrix User s Guide ControlMatrix Console CD Player Radio MMM Radio 4KQ MP3 Jukebox Figure 6 8 Wallplate Background Association To specify the background associated with each of the four selection buttons on the wall mounted control panel select a button or group of buttons from the Wallplate BGND Button list and then select the desir
7. 8 to 24dBu With this setting the CAB will deliver 4dBu when a MediaMatrix View File meter on the output reads OdB When the system is operated nominally at the meter OdB level output headroom will be 20dB 2 Set the CAB Gain rotary control View File CABo device to OdB 3 Set the individual Zone Level controls for both Paging and Bkgnd to 0dB in ControlMatrix Console see Section 6 3 4 Adjust the individual loudspeaker amplifier gain level controls for appropriate acoustic output levels Once the system has been commissioned the above controls should require no further adjustment Changes to operational levels should be made only in ControlMatrix Console using the individual Zone Level controls for Paging and Bkgnd 4 1 12 Troubleshooting ControlNet Network Problems If there does not appear to be any connection happening between the Q Host and MediaMatrix machines it is most likely that there is a cabling or setup problem In this event 1 Check that all of the network cables are OK and connected to a network switch 2 Check that the ControlNet network and CobraNet network connections are either made to separate networks or that the VLANs on the network switch have been setup If the CobraNet data is allowed onto the ControlNet network e g if the VLANs have not been correctly setup a busy CobraNet network will swamp the ControlNet network especially if any of the ControINet network links are 10 Base T 3 Make
8. COM Port 4 qhosti CA485 Devices Display Signs Telephone Interface Unused V4 0US September 2004 Figure 5 7 4xSerial Card devices Page 49 MediaMatrix 22 ControlMatrix User s Guide ControlMatrix Console The serial ports can be used to communicate with RS485 CA485 devices Display Signs Telephone paging units a MODEM or with another Q Host for redundant systems 5 4 Network System Interlinking Dialog The ControlMatrix Network System Interlinking NSI module makes it possible for one ControlMatrix system to make pages live announcements and recorded message playback into one or more remote ControlMatrix systems ControlMatrix systems traditionally consist of one Q Host with an option for a redundant host to replace the primary one in the event of a failure To facilitate the enhanced functionality provided by the NSI module Q Hosts are networked using TCP IP over their Control network ports Each Q Host is configured with the IP addresses of remote Q Hosts on the network and maintains a list of all the paging zones these hosts are responsible for As part of the configuration each system will be given a unique system name This name will be used to identify a particular system in the ControlMatrix GUIs and to designate zones that reside within these systems The Network System Interlinking dialog Figure 5 8 is used to configure system interlinking It lists each networked s
9. 203 12 3 Telephone Paging Unit Voice 204 12 3 1 PEN 204 12 9 2 BASIC PIOCOGUIG o tt cater ater Do ira gat et 204 12 3 3 Customized Prompts Pad od De ob bead ed Pte pb Rute ide Dude 205 12 4 Multiple Node System Configuration eee 207 207 12 4 2 Why multiple 207 124 3 Backgro nd last bae Aan Ea 207 12 4 4 ControlMatrix Network Basic Setup 21 207 12 4 5 Multiple CobraNet 216 12 5 Determining the number of S560 Cards required in a system 221 FER P 221 12 6 Redundant 223 12 8 T Redundant pair 0 223 12 5 2 JCODDBIBIOK ooi C 223 12 6 3 Redundant MediaMatrix 224 12 7 Network System Interlinking 225 12 7 1 Setting up a system for NOM uxo onto upon a epitope aps 225 12 7 2 Paging to remote systems
10. Zone Type Paging Zones may be of type Standard controlled by ControlMatrix Console alone SVC1 local volume control SVC2 local volume control and source selection or SCP comprehensive local control V4 0US September 2004 Page 234
11. 1 and its host PCU are mutually exclusive 1 permits an operator to initiate a paging event determined by programming of the associated PCU3 or PCU4 at installation see Section 8 3 1 3 The 1 may be programmed to use the page code that is currently selected on the PCUA or a nominated and fixed page code only At the an operator can initiate an event and make spoken announcements via a microphone 9 9 2 Operation An RMP is wall mounted control unit with the following features Hand held microphone with Press to talk switch e Two color Status indicator e Busy indicator 9 9 2 1 Microphone A sensitive noise canceling hand held microphone is provided on the front panel for spoken announcements The microphone is fitted with a Press to talk switch see below The microphone is stored on a clip mounted on the right side of the panel When preparing to make an announcement slide the microphone upwards out of the clip and place it in the palm of the hand with fingers or thumb on the Ptt switch For correct speech quality the microphone must be used very close to the mouth The small rubber strip on the top of the microphone must be rested on the face above the upper lip during use Gently replace the microphone in the clip after use Warning Poor sound quality will result if the RMP1 microphone 15 not used at very close proximity to the mouth V4 0US September 2004 Page 171 MediaMat
12. Ihave a problem with PCU2 e havea problem with a PCU3 or RMPI lhavea problem with a PCU4 or RMPI h I have a problem with RS485 over CABs 10 3 10 190 e My CAB based port does not work 10 3 10 1 190 V4 0US September 2004 Page 179 MediaMatrix 22 ControlMatrix User s Guide Debugging 10 3 Fault Tree Solutions This section offers solutions to the most common faults that operators may experience when using the ControlMatrix system To quickly access the solution to a problem locate the fault description in the guide in Section 10 2 above Then use the section numbering and page numbering provided to locate the appropriate solution 10 3 1 I have a problem with the Q Host 10 3 1 1 It does not boot a b c d e g h Check the Q Host has RAM installed and that it is correctly seated in its socket Check that the processor has been installed correctly Make sure the hard disk drive has been installed and that the power cable is correctly connected Also check that the 40 way ribbon cable is correctly fitted Make sure that the single board computer card and all other peripheral cards have been correctly seated in their respective card slots Make sure the power LED on the front panel illuminates when the host is switched on Also check the power supply LEDs on the riser card inside the host The 3 3V 5V 5V 12V and 12V should all be illuminated when the host is powered Attach a mon
13. The Telephone Paging Unit Manager provides controls for specifying the serial port used for communication with TPUs It is also used to assign addresses PINs and descriptive labels to the units The TPU Manager automatically assigns a telephone line number to each TPU channel These line numbers correspond to outputs in the MediaMatrix view file To create a new Telephone Paging Unit click the Add Device button on the Telephone Paging Unit Manager The TPU type selection dialog will appear V4 0US September 2004 Page 54 ControlMatrix User s Guide ControlMatrix Console ahost2 COM2 Figure 5 11 TPU type selection Select the type of TPU from the drop down list box provided Available types include TPUI EF 200 TPU2 and If installed together TPUI EF200 s TPU2 4s must be connected on separate serial ports Choose the serial port that will be used to communicate with this particular unit from the Select COM port drop down list Click the Done button once the TPU type and serial port have been specified At this point Setup will add the number of telephone interface channels appropriate for the type of TPU device selected One channel for an TPUI 200 two for and four for a The Cancel button can be used to abort the operation TPU4 line 3 TPU Input 10 ahost2 COM2 TPU4 line 4 Telephone input 16 ahost2 COM2 TPU4 line 5 Telephone input 17 ahost2 COM2 TPU4 line 6 Telephone input
14. 174 S TOZT DescppHoti qa aus 174 9 10 2 ODO RAL MT 174 10 Debu 10 1 M 177 10 1 1 Monitoring System Inputs and 2 2 222 177 10 1 2 Using the Ping Utility eoi tite ictal esac te ease te teed toe ia 177 10 2 Fault Tree 177 10 3 Fault Tree Sol tionS dun 180 10 3 1 I have a problem with the 285512 180 10 3 2 have a problem with the 181 10 3 3 a 181 10 3 4 I get no store and forward 181 10 3 5 I get no seheduled acliViby 182 10 3 6 have a problem with the Remote Access Windows Client 182 10 3 7 have a problem with ControlMatrix 182 10 3 8 have a problem with a wall mounted controller 185 10 3 9 I have a problem with a PCU edis 187 10 3 10 have a problem with R8485 over CABS 190 11 1 Pag
15. Input Available Inputs Clear in Room 23 South corner No clear time 35 Refresh Room 25 West end Mute Backgnd 1 Dont Clear Priority High E X puck on signal Available Zones Destination Zones Main Concourse Gate Lounge 14 Terminal amp Gate Lounge 15 Terminal B Gate Lounge 16 Golden Wing Lounge Gate Lounge 17 Food Court Gate Lounge 18 Gate Lounge 19 Gate Lounge 20 Gate Lounge 21 Gate Lounge 22 Gate Lounge 23 Gate Lounge 24 Figure 6 10 User Input Duration To specify the duration of the assignment in minutes use the Clear In controls By default the assignment will be a permanent one and the Don t Clear button will be set To enter a clear time deselect the Don t Clear button and type the time in minutes into the Clear in text box If an assignment has been active for some it time may be desirable to know how many minutes remain before the assignment will clear out To refresh remaining minutes displayed in the Clear In text box click the Refresh button It is necessary to assign a priority to each assignment low default medium high or highest To change the priority of an input assignment select the desired priority level from the Priority drop down list The input assignment can be made to mute the background that would normally be playing in the destination paging zones for the duration of the assignment Alternatively the assignment can be mad
16. export TZ est05edt04 M4 1 0 2 M10 5 0 2 bin rtc 1 hw Dev amp V4 0US September 2004 Page 217 MediaMatrix lt p ControlMatrix User s Guide Advanced Topics emu87 amp Pipe amp bin Dev ser N dev serl 3 8 4 amp bin Dev ser N dev ser2 2 8 3 amp Dev ansi Q n2 amp reopen CON KBD prefix A dev console dev conl Dev par amp Dev pty n16 amp bin Fsys eide fsys 0 1 5 1 eide a170 i15 bin Fsys floppy a3f0 i6 bin Iso9660fsys 41 0 41 0 amp Define the default CD Rom bin prefix A cd 0 cd1 0 etc config inteltrap nameloc amp chkfsys P Dosfsys 0 if test f etc config bin tcpip S NODI then etc config bin tcpip S NOD Fl fi if test f etc config bin ph NODE then etc config bin ph NODE else tinit t dev conl amp fi Set time zone variable export TZ S head n1 etc config timezone bin rtc l hw export ENV etc config envvars Mqueue amp cron amp Start socket services etc netstart Start SAMBA daemons SMBfsys u SMBUSER n QNXNODESNODE 6 user smb SMBUSER smb vdir m1M n usr local samba var 6 usr local samba bin smbd D usr local samba bin nmbd D Boot into Photon ph amp Initialise Serial Port attributes slay f Dev32 ser Dev ser t8 3f8 4 2f8 3 amp start ControlMatrix ba
17. 4855 23567 SVC1 31 OFFLINE 4855 CABNW1 23567 2 81 OFFLINE 4855 23567 50 2 25 OFFLINE 4855 CABNW1 23567 Expecting 5 4855 23567 485 Cable mmratc 18999 Connected successfully to RATC 0 mmratc 18999 RATCVersion 0 97 mmratc 18998 start multi line 109 length 54 mmratc 18999 Welcome Defaultuser try help if you mmratc 18999 are confused mmratc 18338 Multi line log completed mmratc 18999 start multi line log length 87 mmratc 18999 statusIs running C Program Files Med mmratc 18999 jaMatrix mMWare Wiews controlMatrrix 1 mmratc 18999 card pav mmratc 18998 Multi line log completed mmratc 18999 RATC comms GOOD mmratc 18999 RATC 1 open to mediamatrix mmratc 18999 1 socket s open 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 Figure 6 29 System Log Display To enable Update mode check the Update button To enable Browse mode check the Browse button These buttons are mutually exclusive Each log entry consists of seven fields The first field is the Time field It is a time stamp indicating when the entry went into the log The Type field is next It indicates the type of entry being logged For details of these entry types see Section 12 1 1 The third field Process indicates the name of the process that issued the log entry The four
18. 6 7 Diagnostics Menu The Diagnostics Menu accesses tools for troubleshooting the ControlMatrix system The System Alarms dialog summarizes any system component failures on categorized tabs The System Log provides detailed progress information related to component activity in the system 6 7 1 System Alarms Dialog The System Alarms Dialog Figure 6 28 accessible from the Diagnostics Menu provides feedback concerning the well being of the ControlMatrix system Global Alarms tab displays all outstanding fault conditions for the system remaining four tabs are used to categorize the system status and to limit the number of entries visible at one time Description RATC comms GOOD RATC Alarm 1 GOOD RATC Alarm 2 GOOD RATC Alarm 3 GOOD RATC Alarm 4 GOOD RATC Alarm 5 GOOD RATC Alarm 6 GOOD RATC Alarm 7 GOOD RATC Alarm 8 GOOD RATC Alarm 9 BAD RATC Alarm 10 BAD RATC Alarm 11 BAD RATC Alarm 12 BAD Wave device 1 online Waveplayer channel O online Waveplayer channel 1 online Waveplayer channel 2 online Waveplayer channel 3 online wn ab sk CREE O Qm m o 1 1 1 1 1 4 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 4 4 Pop up alarm panel Disable buzzer Figure 6 28 System Alarms Dialog The Hardware tab displays the operating state of the hardware components of the system These include the MediaMatrix wave players and recorders amongst others Items displayed in blue t
19. Compilation of the event schedule is accomplished using the Schedule Configuration dialog Figure 6 12 accessible from the Scheduling menu A list of all scheduled events is displayed in the left pane right pane displays the event details and is also used to make changes to event configuration As such it will be referred to as the configuration pane and the pane on the left side will be called the event list pane The event list pane lists each event using its descriptive label It also indicates the type of event Type Column Description of Scheduled Event Message Play a recorded message to a set of paging zones Background Allocate a background to a set of destination paging zones Input Assign a user input to a set of destination paging zones The last column indicates whether or not the event is enabled Recorded Message Event Event Label Baggage ance 5 Timing Destination Sequence Text Event is Enabled 9 Enabled Enable BGM at 10 Background Assign to Gates Input The event will repeat every Kj 05 minutes Hours Hours Mins startingat 06 2 05 amp and finishing at 22 21 35 2 the 1st January the 2nd February the 3rd week Of March the 4th April the 5th May the Last June Day of week Day of month from Jos June 2003 until finish date New Delete Duplicate Today Calendar None Today Calendar Scheduler Enabled Apply Cancel Don
20. ControlMatrix has a facility for paging from users who dial into the system using a standard telephone device called a Telephone Paging Unit TPU is used to interface between the ControlMatrix system and the wired telephone network When a user dials into the TPU a series of audio prompts are played from the 5560 MessageNet card into the TPU to tell users what 15 expected of them The owner of the ControlMatrix installation has the option of replacing the standard set of prompts supplied with the system with a new set that may have more appropriate local attributes language accent cultural characteristics It may also be desirable to provide a shorter set of prompts for experienced telephone paging users This chapter explains how to create a new set of prompts and deploy them within the ControlMatrix system This chapter assumes that the user is proficient in processing wave files on PCs using the Windows operating system Software and hardware tools for recording and editing audio are not provided with the ControlMatrix system Common third party tools may be used for this purpose e g a PC with sound card running recording editing software such as CoolEdit 2000 www syntrillium com 12 3 1 Background TPU prompts are stored as a set of standard windows format wave files WAV extension recorded at 48kHz 16bit linear PCM mono format The audio samples are normalized to peak of 10dBFS as this has been determined to provide an
21. It permits the two repeater banks to operate in a linked fashion so that one CAB serves all ten RS485 ports The Bank A CAB port is used in LINKED mode and the Bank B CAB port is disabled INDEPENDENT mode permits each of the two repeater banks to function independently of the other A separate CAB serves each bank REDUNDANT mode allows the ports of the two repeater banks to run in parallel so that failure of one will result in the other taking up the repeater function Repeater mode selection is determined by presence or absence of links to ground from two rear panel terminals as follows e Linked mode is selected when no links are in placed V4 0US September 2004 Page 142 MediaMatrix 22 ControlMatrix User s Guide Installation Reference Independent mode is selected by linking the terminal marked Independent to any of the RS485 port shield connections ground or chassis Redundant mode is selected by linking the terminal marked Redundant to any of the RS485 port shield connections ground or chassis Linked mode will be selected if both of the Independent and Redundant terminals are linked to ground Figure 8 5 provides an example of a typical cabling regime for the PCU 2100 operating in linked mode PCU2100 Control Panel b Daisy Chain 4 anel Daisy Chain 3 PCU 11 PCU 12 Figure 8 5 Linked mode RS485 cabling for the PCU 2100 Note there are no mode links i
22. This card provides another network port for connection to CA485 devices via the CobraNet 4xSerial Card Is a four port PCI serial card installed in either a Q Host or an A Host This card provides four additional serial ports for connection to CA485 devices display signs or telephone paging units Other IP Device This is any other networked device that supports the IP networking protocol and requires monitoring by the system There are two pre defined devices These are the qhostl1 and mediamatrix devices The qhostl device is the primary Q Host The mediamatrix device is the primary MediaMatrix in the system Changes to the Network Devices Configuration dialog are saved after editing when the Done button is clicked to exit V4 0US September 2004 Page 45 MediaMatrix 22 ControlMatrix User s Guide ControlMatrix Console Device Type Specific Details Device Type 0 Ho Address 10 21 1 51 10 60 451 Device Name Control Network Network ghost Default gateway 10211165 ahost1 A Host ga msgnet1 MessageNet Card 10 60 4 251 00 50 2b 02 55 c5 mediamatrix1 Medi aMatrix 10 21 1 20 COM Port 1 Alphavision Signs lt courtesyhost Courtesy Host 10221212213 ecard Ethernet Card COM Port 2 Telephone Interface 2 4 remoteghost Other IP Device 10 21 1 89 cab8015 Other IP Device 10 60 4 221 Figure 5 2 Network Devices Configuration dialog
23. To create a new network device click the Add Device button Choose the type of device from the Device Type drop down list Next enter a device name that can be used to identify the device The name must not contain any spaces Then depending on the type of device selected it will be necessary to enter some device specific details If the Q Host device type is selected enter the IP address of the host on the ControlNet network as well as the IP address of the host on the CobraNet network If the Q Host resides on a pre existing IP network ensure that the IP address supplied is valid for the Subnet of the existing network The same applies for the CobraNet network In the absence of an existing network use the 192 168 1 Subnet for the ControlNet network 192 168 2 for CobraNet network The last three digits of the IP address can be freely chosen but no two devices can have the same address e g 192 168 1 router eateway be used to access a range of addresses outside the ControlNet and CobraNet subnetworks Type the IP address of the router into the text box labeled Default Gateway The Q Host has two serial ports in its default configuration COM port 1 and COM port 2 Define the role of these ports using the drop down list boxes provided on the pane on the right side of the dialog box below the IP addresses The serial ports can be used to communicate with CA485 devices Display Signs Telephone paging units a MODEM or w
24. While making a delayed announcement status indications are as for a standard live announcement 1 e Amber Please Wait Green Talk Now After the operator has finished making the announcement and the Ptt switch 1s released the amber Wait indicator will begin to flash and continue for five seconds During this period Cancel will be displayed on the LCD If the operator presses the Ptt switch within this five second period the delayed announcement will be discarded and the system will return to idle status If five seconds elapses without a Ptt switch press the delayed announcement will be released for playback RMP Active This display indicates that the RMP1 associated with the PCU4 is currently in use and therefore the page code displayed by the PCUA is in use by the RMPI This display will correspond with illumination of the red Busy indicator see Section 9 7 2 5 The page code used by the RMPI is configured at installation and cannot be altered by PCU4 operator V4 0US September 2004 Page 164 MediaMatrix lt p ControlMatrix User s Guide Using Devices 9 7 2 5 Busy Indicator red indicator labeled Busy is located on the front panel It illuminates when the Ptt switch on an associated is operated When the lamp is illuminated all paging activity from an associated will preclude operation of the PCU4 Note that a similar lamp illuminates on the RMP1 when the PCU4 Ptt switch is operate
25. icon on the QNX desktop and search on Pterm Syntax for the Ping utility is common to Windows and QNX as follows ping 192 168 1 10 ping a device whose IP address is 192 168 1 10 or ping remotehost ping a device whose IP host name is remotehost If successful the Ping utility will display statistics based on the periodic transmission and response 10 2 Fault Tree Guide I have a problem with the Q Host 10 3 1 V4 0US September 2004 Page 177 MediaMatrix lt p ControlMatrix User s Guide Debugging It does not boot 180 e It boots but makes no network connections 180 e t boots but the system remains unresponsive 180 Q Host can not connect to the MediaMatrix 10 3 2 1 181 I have a problem with the Remote Access Windows Client Error Phindows exe not found ControlMatrix must be in the same directory as Phindows exe to run Error serious file error occurred while reading the Preferences Error Username and or password fields have been left blank Error The new process could not be opened Error The new process timed out Error The process could not be started Error System resource allocation error Terminating Process Error The program did not reply as expected and has been terminated Error ControlMatrix attempts to login but after a while does nothing and puts the message An error occurred Check the ControlMatrix Host setup into a dialog box I have a problem with ControlMatrix Consol
26. 22 ControlMatrix User s Guide Using Devices In place of the page code description one of three other terms may be displayed in Region 2 as follows Please Wait This display indicates that the PCU is currently sourcing the page code description from the ControlMatrix System It may appear for a brief period only Code Barred This display indicates that the code selected is not an Active Code for this PCU4 While the code may be defined as a Global Code it has not been allocated for use on this unit Undefined Code This display indicates that the code selected has not been defined in the ControlMatrix system Display Region 3 Status Text appearing in Region 3 indicates the status of the PCU4 the selection or the paging activity as follows Idle Indicates that the page code selected is defined and available for use by the PCU4 and that there are no busy zones in the selected code No Network Indicates that the PCU is not connected to a functioning CA485 network This display is accompanied by flashing of the Power No Network indicator The cause may be that there are no servers running on the Q Host the MediaMatrix and hence the local CAB is not configured correctly there is a cabling fault there is a hardware fault affecting communications or the PCU is not configured correctly in the Q Host Busy Each valid paging code facilitates a paging event to one or more zones This display indicates that at least one
27. 5 2 of this manual for information about licensing 7 2 2 Configuring Courtesy Messages Before ControlMatrix Courtesy can be used messages must be configured This process is performed in ControlMatrix Console see Section 6 7 2 3 To Start ControlMatrix Courtesy ControlMatrix Courtesy is accessible either from the desktop of the Q Host graphical user interface or via the ControlMatrix Windows Client from a networked PC running Microsoft Windows To start Courtesy from the Q Host log in at the graphical prompt using the DefaultUser user name and password Locate the Courtesy icon on the ControlMatrix toolbar and click once To start Courtesy from a PC running Microsoft Windows via the ControlMatrix Windows Client double click on the Courtesy icon and then enter the DefaultUser user name and password V4 0US September 2004 Page 124 ControlMatrix User s Guide 7 2 4 Making a Courtesy Announcement When Courtesy is started a dialog will appear as illustrated below Countrylink wishes to advise passengers waiting at Station gt that the XPT service to Sydney is expected to arrive in approximately 20 minutes Figure 7 1 ControlMatrix Courtesy To make an announcement Select the courtesy sequence to announce from the list on the left side of the window Add the required courtesy text into the courtesy text insertion box upper right side of window Check that the preview of the message is correct
28. 76 MediaMatrix lt p ControlMatrix User s Guide ControlMatrix Console V4 0US September 2004 Page 77 MediaMatrix ve 6 ControlMatrix Console Reference MediaMatrix lt p ControlMatrix User s Guide ControlMatrix Console 6 1 Introduction ControlMatrix Console is the user interface for day to day operation of the system ControlMatrix Console is used to Change the function of PCU paging station page codes Allocate background sources to paging zones Adjust background and paging audio levels Create user input assignments to a group of paging zones Schedule recorded announcement background allocation and input assignment events Manage recorded announcement WAV files and associate text with them Assess the operational state of the system via the alarm pane and system log 6 1 1 To Start Console ControlMatrix Console is accessible either from the desktop of the Q Host graphical user interface or via the ControlMatrix Windows Client from a networked PC running Microsoft Windows To start Console from the Q Host log in at the graphical prompt using the DefaultUser user name and password Locate the Console icon on the ControlMatrix toolbar and click once To start Console from a PC running Microsoft Windows via the ControlMatrix Windows Client double click on the Console icon and then enter the DefaultUser user name and password V4 0US September 2004 Page 79 MediaMatrix 22 ControlMatrix User s Gui
29. CAA85 is a proprietary protocol that utilizes RS485 as its communication transport layer RS485 15 an international standard for data communication yet no standard communications protocol is defined 1 4 2 Power Each Paging Station and Wall Plate Controller requires an appropriate low voltage power supply V4 0US September 2004 Page 11 MediaMatrix lt p ControlMatrix User s Guide Overview For paging stations the required power is between 12V 0 12V and 15V 0 15V either DC or AC 170m per unit For wall plates the required power is between 12V and 15V either or DC 40mA per unit The MediaMatrix PCU 2100 15 the recommended unit to supply power for these devices Within each PCU 2100 there are two supplies that can be configured either as two discrete supplies or as a single redundant system if fault tolerance is required Each supply or the redundant pair provide power for up to eight paging stations and ten wall plate devices 1 4 3 Audio MediaMatrix CAB8i or CAB16i units are required to bridge analog audio from PCUs or Background sources to CobraNet for transport to the MediaMatrix and to distribute the 485 control data between the Q Host and the paging stations and wall controllers At least one CAB8i or CAB16i is required in each system to facilitate connection of the CA485 data to the field units It is suggested that the power supplies Section 1 4 2 above should be co located with CAB units s
30. Console A twelve button keypad is used for selection while a two line LCD provides user feedback of system status and paging destinations Wall Mount Four Button Station The PCU3 Paging Control Unit is similar to a PCUI but is a wall mounting device with a handheld microphone PCU3 functionality is identical to a PCUI An RMPI remote paging microphone may be used in conjunction with a PCU3 V4 0US September 2004 Page 23 MediaMatrix 22 ControlMatrix User s Guide ControlMatrix Elements PCUA Wall Mount Keypad LCD Station The PCU4 Paging Control Unit is similar to a PCU2 but is a wall mounting device with a handheld microphone PCUA functionality 1s identical to a PCU2 An remote paging microphone may be used in conjunction with a PCUA PCUS Desktop Keypad LCD Station The PCUS Paging Control Unit is similar to a PCU2 except that it includes a supplementary user programmable 32 hot key console The console is used to store and recall frequently used page codes In all other respects the PCUS functions like a PCU2 RMPI Paging Microphone The is an optional accessory for the PCU3 and PCU4 It provides an additional microphone for applications that require two microphones associated with one paging station e g gate lounge and aero bridge One RMPI only may be linked to a PCU3 or PCU4 an RMP1 cannot function without an associated PCU3 or PCU4 RMPI is a wall mount unit with a handheld microphone I
31. ControlMatrix Console The device must then be given an address between 2 and 255 This device address corresponds to that set on the DIP switches on the device itself Address 0 is invalid and address is reserved for the CA485 master No two devices the same port can have the same address To define the device address type it into the text box provided Finally enter a descriptive label that can be used to identify the device It will not be possible to proceed until all the fields have been completed To remove one or a number of devices from the system select them by clicking on the appropriate items in the device list then click the Remove Devices button To select a range of devices select the first item in the range and then while holding down the Shift key select the last item in the range To select multiple devices at random hold down the Ctrl key while selecting the items to be removed one by one To save changes made to the CA485 devices click the Done button 5 6 Display Sign Manager The Display Sign Manager Figure 5 10 is used for the configuration of text display signs that the ControlMatrix system uses to augment standard audio pages with the display of relevant text for the duration of the page The Display Sign Manager provides controls to create delete and configure Alphavision Eclipse 9000 signs as well a generic sign interface The Alphavision signs are controlled via one of the Q Host serial ports The Generic
32. Devices eeeeeeeeeeee eene eene eene 36 42 2 B ilding the View FIG tua b iad euskal atts e 36 4 2 3 Making the View File Run from 011 100002 37 4 3 MediaMatrix requirements for ControlMatrix 4 37 4 3 1 MediaMatrix Card Complement and 37 4 3 2 firmware versions required for 38 4 3 3 What MWare versions support ControlMatrix 38 4 4 Installing ControlMatrix Windows Client on a PC 39 4 5 Where get more information 40 5 ControlMatrix Setu 5 1 INTFODUCHON ee eee ea eee 43 5ST 43 51 2 Wizard MOS eene t neh 43 92123 Standard 43 52 Licensing 44 5 3 Network Devices Configuration Dialog 45 5 4 Network System Interlinking Dialog 50 5 5 485
33. Failed This display indicates that the Ptt switch has been pressed but the request has failed for some reason The cause may be that there is an error in the configuration file for that PCU the global code definition has an error or some required resource for the page is not available e g the MediaMatrix or a wave player device This display corresponds to the amber Wait indicator extinguishing after a recorded message page code has been initiated see Section 9 7 2 2 Talk Now This display indicates that the Ptt switch has been pressed and the page has been correctly set up in the system any preamble has finished and the audio path is open On seeing this display the operator should immediately make a live page into the microphone This display corresponds to illumination of the green Go indicator Req Queued This display occurs when the Ptt switch has been pressed the selected code represents a recorded message and the request to play the message has been accepted by the system A Req Queued display corresponds to the green Go indicator flashing after a recorded message page code has been initiated see Section 9 7 2 2 Cancel This display relates to a page code configured for Delayed Release see Section 6 2 1 Page codes must be individually configured for this mode of operation For codes so configured the system will record live announcements and replay them as soon as the destination zones are available
34. Host It is possible to use only one or 2 per serial port however TPU4 units may be cascaded via their DSP link connectors to achieve up to 16 lines of telephone paging TPU2s may not be linked in this way It is possible to add additional telephone paging lines to a system that has a TPU2 by adding an extra serial port to the Q Host for control of additional TPU1 TPU2 or TPU4 units The address or device ID of an TPU1 EF200 is set using the five DIP switches provided Addresses 0 through to 31 are valid TPU2 and TPU4 device channels are addressed according to their position in the control chain Addresses start at 1 from the first channel of the first device in the chain and increase according to the channel count of each device through to the last channel of the last device in the chain 4 1 4 3 Install SVC Wall Mounted Controllers SVC controllers are usually installed in close proximity to the speaker s they control SVCs require three sets of cables power RS485 and 70 100V speaker feeds Power is supplied from a PCU 2100 power supply usually typically located at a field connection point RS485 usually originates from a local CAB as for PCUs See Chapter 8 for additional information about power and CA485 connections Speaker cables originate at the output of zone power amplifier channels and may be daisy chained where several SVCs are used on one zone SVCls are available in two versions the SVC1 and
35. IP address of the Q Host then press OK Enter in User Name Administrator and in Password administrator both are case sensitive note capital for user name lower case for password and check if the login is successful If it is close the window and repeat for the other shortcuts If it is unsuccessful there is most likely networking problem Check that the PC is on the correct network by attempting to ping the Q Host V4 0US September 2004 Page 39 MediaMatrix 22 ControlMatrix User s Guide Getting Started 4 5 Where can get more information For information relating to the ControlNet Setup and ControlNet Console see the following two chapters of this document For troubleshooting suggestions see Chapter 10 Debugging and Chapter 11 Frequently Asked Questions Additional information may be available on the Peavey website http mediamatrix peavey com or the MediaMatrix online help Additional information may also be available on the Creative Audio website http www creativeaudio com au For general assistance with CobraNet see http www peakaudio com CobraNet Background html For assistance with setting up a CobraNet network see http www peakaudio com CobraNet Network Design html V4 0US September 2004 Page 40 MediaMatrix lt p ControlMatrix User s Guide Getting Started V4 0US September 2004 Page 41 MediaMatrix ve 5 ControlMatrix Setup Reference Medi
36. Ihave a problem with ControlMatrix Console 10 3 7 1 I can t start ControlMatrix Console from the desktop icon on a remote PC a Make sure the IP address of the Q Host has been correctly specified b Make sure the IP address of the remote PC 15 in the same IP Subnet as the Q Host c Ensure the remote PC is communicating correctly with other hosts on the same Subnet d Make sure the Q Host is powered up and showing the graphical user interface or a graphical login prompt V4 0US September 2004 Page 182 MediaMatrix 22 ControlMatrix User s Guide Debugging e Check that ControlNet software has been correctly installed on the Q Host 10 3 7 2 background source level faders don t work or I get a GET BACKGROUND LEVEL error a Using the ControlMatrix Console System Alarms panel check that RATC comms GOOD appears under the Hardware tab If not then see 10 3 2 1 The Q Host can t connect to the MediaMatrix b Make sure you have started the ControlMatrix servers in ControlMatrix Setup c Use the signal probe in the MediaMatrix View File to monitor the background source and ensure it is getting to the MediaMatrix correctly 10 3 7 3 Background allocation doesn t work a Using the ControlMatrix Console System Alarms panel check that RATC comms GOOD appears under the Hardware tab If not then see 10 3 2 1 The Q Host can t connect to the MediaMatrix b Make sure you have started the ControlMatrix ser
37. Label Main Concourse Terminal Terminal B Golden Wing Lounge Food court Gate Lounge 14 Gate Lounge 15 Gate Lounge 16 Gate Lounge 17 Gate Lounge 18 Gate Lounge 13 Gate Lounge 20 Gate Lounge 21 Gate Lounge 22 Gate Lounge 23 Gate Lounge 24 Information Desk Banquet Hall Western Bar Unused cn A co E 5 2 Standard Standard Standard Standard Standard Standard Standard Standard Standard Standard Standard Standard Standard Standard 5 1 SCP sep Unused Figure 5 16 Zone Attributes Configuration Food Court Generic Main Concourse E9000 Info Desk E9000 Golden Wing Lounge E9000 Food court Main Concourse Information Desk Golden Wing Lounge z Assign to zone Edit sign details To change the label for a paging zone select it in the zone list and then type the new label into the Edit Zone Label text box To change the type of a particular zone select it in the zone list and then choose the desired zone type from the drop down list It is possible to select multiple paging zones and change them all simultaneously to the same type Changes to the Zone Attribute Configuration dialog are saved after editing when the Done button is clicked to exit V4 0US September 2004 Page 60 MediaMatrix 22 ControlMatrix User s Guide ControlMatrix Console Display sign to zone allocations are displayed on the Sign Allocation tab on the right side of th
38. Message Configuration dialog in ControlMatrix Console see Section 6 6 7 1 1 What is Text to Speech TTS Text to Speech TTS technology is used to convert text strings into synthesized voice or speech waveforms These waveforms are generated by breaking the text string down into a series of basic phonemes that are then joined together by the TTS software synthesizer engine The most difficult aspect of synthesis is making phonemes join smoothly TTS technology has been in development for several years but only in recent times has synthesis approached the sonic quality of a natural human voice Voices are now available in either gender and with a range of accents and languages ControlMatrix has designed in capability to move ahead with rapidly advancing TTS technology 7 1 2 TTS in ControlMatrix ControlMatrix uses the Speechify TTS engine developed by Speechworks International Inc www speechworks com Speechify s advantages include a variety of available voices and as fast conversion times Speechify runs as a server on a dedicated Windows 2000 based PC known in ControlMatrix as the C Host Numerous voices can be installed and run under the same server process V4 0US September 2004 Page 123 MediaMatrix 22 ControlMatrix User s Guide 7 2 Using ControlMatrix Courtesy 7 2 1 Licensing ControlMatrix Courtesy is a licensed module of ControlMatrix A license must be obtained and installed before use See Section
39. Page 109 MediaMatrix 22 ControlMatrix User s Guide ControlMatrix Console Asse Manager WAV Manager Text Association Preamble Selection Selected Message cm waves airstaff wav au Modify Text Enter Message Text Would all airport staff please retum to the terminal now Customers and passengers are requested to wait until a further announcement is made before entering the building Please allow staff to enter first File name C3tts lt Directory gt 3 Pause 1 seconds wav 3 Pause 10 seconds wav Pause 2 seconds wav 3 Pause 5 seconds way Would all airport staff please return to the terminal now Customers and passengers O alarmbells wav May have your attention please The fire alarm bells are sounding in the building D alarmtest May have your attention please The fire alarm system in the terminal building is D baggage wav For the safety of the travellers please do not leave your bags unattended and do n 3 baggagebelt wav cimonitors way D courtesy wayv For you convenience white courtesy telephones are located throughout the concot 3 emergency way D evacuate wav flightinfo wav Edinburgh airport regrets to announce that the flight information system is not updat 3 security wav smoking wav In accordance with the clean indoor air act smoking is prohibited in the terminal To edit the text associated with a particular WAV file first select the
40. Radio MMM Background Info Desk MP3 Jukebox Background Main Concourse PCU PCU PCU2 Main Concourse Information Counter PCU PCUS Info Counter Gate Lounge 42 PCU PCU PCU3 Gate Lounge 42 Gate Lounge 13 PCU PCU PCU1 Gate Lounge 13 Gate Lounge 17 PCU PCU PCU1 Gate Lounge 17 Check In Desk PCU PCU PCU2 Check In Desk Telephone paging input Telephone TPU at 1 Western Bar Input SCP Local SCP Westem Bar Banquet Hall Input SCP Local SCP Banquet Hall Room 23 North corner User Room 25 West end User Room 23 South corner User Unused Unused 1 Edit PCU Devices Cancel Done Figure 5 14 Adding PCU devices To add a new PCU device to the system click the Edit PCU Devices button This will open the CA485 Device Manager New PCU devices will appear in the paging station drop down list on the Input Device Details pane once the CA485 Device Manager has been closed See Section 5 5 CA485 Device Manager for details on how to create new PCU device To connect a PCU device to a system input select the system input from the list on the left side of the dialog and then select the PCU device from the drop down list box on the Input Device Details pane Current assignments are displayed the Device column in the system inputs list A system input cannot be connected to more than one PCU Some PCUSs will be co located with an SVC wall mounted volume controls This SVC can be used to mute paging audio to the a
41. Redundant pair Q Hosts For mission critical systems that require hardware duplication two Q Hosts may be configured as redundant pair Two entirely equivalent Q Hosts hosts are installed in the system differing only by their QNX node number set during installation and IP address configurable from ControlMatrix Setup While both hosts should be powered up only one of the pair will run the system at any one time In this condition any configuration changes are automatically copied from the active host to the standby host The changes may take a few minutes to propagate but are initiated without user intervention Obviously it is not possible for the automatic update procedure to work if the standby host is off so under normal circumstances it should always be left powered up and ready to operate Initially both hosts are idle and are thus powered up into the standby state One of the pair may then be configured using ControlMatrix Setup and the system server processes started Once the server processing are running on one host it becomes the Active Host The Active Host then generates lists of system files that have changed during configuration and operation The Standby Host is then responsible for acting on the lists of changed files and updating its own configuration from the active host When a host is active in the system there are interlocks present that prevent server processes from being started on the standby host If there is no ac
42. Setup If I try to press more than one button the first button I select is deselected This is correct These buttons are mutually exclusive one only can be a selected at a time 10 3 9 7 I have a problem with a PCU2 The network LED is flashing and the LCD screen displays the following PCUI 2 X XX Addr XX where X can be any number This means the PCU2 is not able to detect the presence of CA485 network The device 15 offline See Section 10 3 7 10 A CA485 device is offline The PCU is on line network LED is solid but the LCD screen displays 000 IDLE This means that a valid page code has not yet been selected Use the keypad to enter the desired page code or use the Next gt gt and Previous lt lt buttons to browse the available page codes When I select the page code that I want the screen shows CODE BARRED This means that the page code is configured but has not been made available to users of this PCU2 To enable this page code use the Paging Station Configuration dialog in ControlMatrix Console to configure the page codes available to this particular PCU2 device Some page codes seem to be missing when I use the lt lt and gt gt buttons Only page codes that have been configured are displayed when using the next gt gt and previous lt lt buttons on a PCU2 10 3 9 8 I have a problem with a PCU3 or RMPI PCU3 operation is very similar to a PCUI See also Sections 10 3 9 I ha
43. The insertion text is shown between the lt and gt symbols Click the Make Announcement button Once the button has been clicked ControlMatrix Courtesy will then log in to the C Host and begin the TTS conversion process This process may take several seconds When the process is complete the courtesy message will be played through the ControlMatrix system If an error occurs in the conversion process the courtesy sequence will not be played Consult Chapter 11 4 for information on errors and troubleshooting To exit ControlMatrix Courtesy click the Done button V4 0US September 2004 Page 125 Media Matrix LB EVA 8 Installation Reference MediaMatrix 22 ControlMatrix User s Guide Installation Reference 8 1 Physical Aspects 8 1 1 Central Equipment Installation The majority of the central equipment should be mounted in a standard 19 inch equipment rack which should be at least 2 feet 600mm The equipment is intended for front to back ventilation so it is advisable not to fit unventilated rack doors It is also advisable to fit the rack s in an air conditioned room and allow free air circulation To aid serviceability consideration should be given to providing rack slides or rear support for the larger heavy items such as the MediaMatrix Q Host A Host s and C Host An RJ45 data patch bay fitted adjacent to network switch es will allow better management and identification of network cables and as
44. To clear an existing page code select the code from the tree list then right click on the page code tree list to reveal the floating menu Select the Clear item A prompt will appear asking for confirmation of the clear operation Click the Proceed button to clear the page code V4 0US September 2004 Page 86 ControlMatrix User s Guide ControlMatrix Console Page Timeout The page timeout defines the maximum duration of a paging announcement made from a paging station in a ControlMatrix system A page whose duration exceeds the prescribed timeout period will be terminated This prevents a given zone from remaining busy for longer than the timeout period The timeout is user configurable and may range between 20 and 120 seconds amp Four Button Paging Stations B Gate Lounge 13 i PCU1 Gate Lounge 17 Pf PCUS Info Counter ET f PCUS Gate Lounge 42 Keypad Paging Stations alarmbells wav alarmtest way rine b abri cm waves baggage wav Pf Gate lounges aggage way def Terminal page baggagebelt Pig D cimonitors wav f PCU2 Main Concourse D courtesy wav 1 8 PCUZ Check In Desk O emergency wav H if at 0 D i 6 TPU at 1 D flightinfo wav D smoking wav Figure 6 5 Setting Page Timeout To set the page timeout enter the desired timeout in the Page Timeout text box locate
45. User s Guide Installation Reference 8 3 1 3 Setting PCU paging stations PCU 485 Address Setup All PCU paging stations have a CA485 address set as part of product testing to the last two digits of the serial number serial numbers ending in 00 are set to address 100 and serial numbers ending in 01 are set to address 101 The factory set address can be changed as required Addresses between 2 and 255 are allowable If a non zero address is changed the unit must be reset by briefly removing power to the unit before the new address will take effect For PCUI PCU2 and PCUS paging stations the address switch is located inside the unit behind the Ptt button To gain access to the switch the plastic case must be removed four screws under the unit note the screws are short at the shallow end of the case and long at the deep end The address switch 1s accessible through an aperture in the internal metal cover For PCU3 and PCU4 paging stations the address switch is accessible from the rear of the unit An address of 0 at wake up will cause a bouncing dot display on the selection switch lamps of a PCU3 and a Addr Zero flashing readout on the display of a PCU4 A valid address 15 accepted by a PCU several seconds after power is first applied following an address change PCU2 PCU4 and PCUS LCD Diagnostic Displays PCU2 PCU4 and PCUS LCD displays provide diagnostic information for the units If the PCU2 PCU4 or PCUS is not lo
46. Windows Explorer browse to My Network Places or Network Neighborhood Entire Network Microsoft Windows Network ControlMatrix qnxnodel public and the cm tpu prompts directory the wave files into this directory Note that the ControlMatrix workgroup may be substituted for a workgroup of another name The required workgroup is the one in which the in the Q Host resides Secondly the files can be transported to the Q Host by a DOS formatted CD or floppy disk Insert the CD or floppy disk in the relevant Q Host drive and select the Photon File Manager filing cabinet icon from the Q Host QNX desktop In the left pane browse to either cd or dos a the source of the files In the left pane select the files to be copied ctl click shifi click for multiple files Right click in the right pane and select Copy Move Type in the destination directory cm tpu prompts and click on the Copy button A dialog will open to warn that the existing set of TPU prompt files are about to be overwritten Click on Yes to All to finalize the copy process Close the File Manager 12 3 3 Customized Prompts As users of a system become experienced a shorter set of prompts may be used to speed up the paging process Also a welcome message for the site could be included Some possibilities are listed in Table 12 3 Any text could be used provided that the intent of the messages remains unchanged V4 0US September 2004 Page 205 ControlMatrix U
47. an event and make spoken announcements via a microphone Each page code comprises two primary elements the first is the source of the page live page or recorded message and the second 15 the destination zone or group of zones to which the source will be directed When a valid page code has been selected pressing the Press to talk Ptt switch will initiate a paging event Note that a page code may only have message sources if the system is fitted with the MessageNet option 9 6 2 Operation A PCU3 is a wall mounted control unit with the following features Hand held microphone with Press to talk switch Two color Status indicator Four Selection Buttons with indicator LEDs Busy indicator Power No Network Indicator These features combine to allow an operator complete control of paging functions 9 6 2 1 Microphone A sensitive noise canceling hand held microphone is provided on the PCU3 front panel for spoken announcements microphone is fitted with a Press to talk switch see below The paging microphone is stored on a clip mounted on the right side of the panel When preparing to make a page slide the microphone upwards out of the clip and place it in the palm of the hand with fingers or thumb on the Ptt switch For correct speech quality the microphone must be used very close to the mouth The small rubber strip on the top of the microphone must be rested on the face above the upper lip during use Gently replace t
48. and PCUS paging stations in the tree To remove page codes from the list of active codes select the codes in the Active Codes list and then click the Remove button V4 0US September 2004 Page 82 MediaMatrix 22 ControlMatrix User s Guide ControlMatrix Console Editing Page Code Attributes All page code attributes are set up and edited in the right pane Page Code Description Each page button code must be given a descriptive label Enter the description in the Description text box at the top right side of the dialog box Live or Pre recorded To select a live or recorded message uncheck the Enable Messages button for live messages or check the button for recorded messages Priority To specify the priority of the announcement select from the options presented in the Priority drop down list Delayed Release To specify delayed release of live pages check the Delayed release button Delayed release is not available for playback of recorded announcements Destination Zones To choose the destination paging zones for the paging announcement select the zone names in the Available Zones list then click the Add button These zones will be added to Destination Zones list Zones can be removed from the Destination Zones list by first selecting them and then clicking the Remove button To select a range of zones select the first zone in the range and while holding down the Shift key select the last zone in the range To select multiple
49. another page code for the correct new number Then copy the information under the wrong old number to the Page Code window you just created Lastly select the unwanted code and press the Clear page code button to delete it ControlMatrix provides a means of copying settings from one page code to another see Section 6 2 1 11 2 Schedules 11 2 1 Configuration Issues Ql I have just set up an event in the configuration window and changed to the Schedule Preview window I clicked on the calendar for one of the days on which it should be running but nothing is displayed I am sure I have clicked all the event enable buttons Why can t I see my event A To view the preview of an event you must set up the search criteria in the left part of the window then press the Apply button to cause the system to search for matching entries that will then appear on the right side of the window Q2 I have set up an open ended event no finish date but when I select Apply I get an Event Config Error Finish time must be after start time Shouldn t the finish time be after the start time with this event A2 Even if No Finish Date 1s selected the finish time for each day must be set and 1s probably presently at the 00 00 default If you want to set a never ending continuous event you will need to set the daily start time to 00 00 and the finish time to 23 59 The event that is scheduled for 23 59 will play before the system stops for the da
50. be recorded professionally or simply be generated via the store and forward mechanism discussed in Section 2 4 ControlMatrix will only play files that are recorded at a sampling rate of 48KHz a bit depth of 16 and one channel only mono This format optimizes speed throughout the system while providing high quality audio It should be noted that ControlMatrix does not play files that are not recorded in the correct format Messages and message sequences are managed by ControlMatrix Console see Chapter 6 and released either by the scheduler in Console or manually from paging stations see Chapter 8 2 6 Paging Priority At any time many sources may compete for access to a particular zone ControlMatrix will arbitrate access to a given zone based on the priority associated with each page or message The background input to all zones is fixed at the lowest priority level Only one background input can be enabled to a given zone at any one time All other paging events as defined in 2 3 are always able to duck the background source in a zone If a zone is engaged it will be engaged by a paging event at a certain priority If only one paging event is occurring in a zone at a time there is no conflict the system will duck the background audio and allow the paging event to run to completion before returning the background source If a second paging event occurs overlapping in time with the first one of several outcomes ma
51. dialog and System Log viewer in ControlMatrix Console to ensure that the S560 MessageNet card is on line and operating correctly e Make sure the MediaMatrix View File has been loaded and compiled and that it is running Then check that the bundle from the S560 MessageNet card is being received and that the bundle being transmitted to the S560 MessageNet card is being received f Use the signal probe device in the MediaMatrix View File to confirm that audio reaches the MediaMatrix from the 5560 MessageNet card 10 3 4 I get no store and forward a Follow the steps outlined in the Section 10 3 3 I get no messaging V4 0US September 2004 Page 181 MediaMatrix 22 ControlMatrix User s Guide Debugging 10 3 5 Iget no scheduled activity a Check that the ControlMatrix servers have been started in ControlMatrix Setup b Make sure the scheduler has been enabled in the Scheduling dialog in ControlMatrix Console c Check the time and date on the Q Host to make sure it is correct d Confirm using the Schedule Preview dialog that there should be Schedule activity at this time Check the system log using the System Log viewer to make sure there are no errors being reported at the time a scheduled event is due to occur 10 3 6 I have a problem with the Remote Access Windows Client 10 3 6 1 Error Phindows exe not found ControlMatrix must be the same directory as Phindows exe to run Solution Place the ControlM
52. file from the list in the bottom right side of the dialog box The file name will be displayed in the Selected Message text box The associated text will be displayed in the text box below the Enter Message Text label Make modifications to the text block by typing them into this text box and then click the Modify Text button to commit the changes Click the Done button to save the changes 6 5 3 Preamble Selection Pane The ControlMatrix system makes it possible to have a different preamble message for each of the four paging priority levels low medium high and highest To select the preamble WAV file for a particular priority level click the Browse button to open a file selection dialog Once the appropriate WAV file has been located select it and click the Select button Alternatively enter the full path and file name in the corresponding text box If the same WAV file will be used for all priority levels select the file as above for the Low priority level Then click the Use LOW priority preamble file for ALL priorities button so that the lamp in the button illuminates a bright green color V4 0US September 2004 Page 110 ControlMatrix User s Guide ControlMatrix Console Click the Done button to save the changes Figure 6 23 Preamble Selection Dialog V4 0US September 2004 Page 111 MediaMatrix 22 ControlMatrix User s Guide ControlMatrix Console 6 6 Courtesy Message Configuration The Courtesy Menu p
53. global code definition has an error or some required resource for the page is not available e g the MediaMatrix or a wave player device This display corresponds to the Ptt button amber indicator extinguishing after a recorded message page code has been initiated see Section 9 5 2 2 Talk Now This display indicates that the Ptt button has been pressed and the page has been correctly set up in the system any preamble has finished and the audio path is open On seeing this display the operator should immediately make a live page into the microphone This display corresponds to a green indication on the LED in the Ptt switch Req Queued This display occurs when the Ptt button has been pressed the selected code represents a recorded message and the request to play the message has been accepted by the system A Req Queued display corresponds to the Ptt button indicator flashing green after a recorded message page code has been initiated see Section 9 5 2 2 Cancel This display relates to a page code configured for Delayed Release see Section 6 2 1 Page codes must be individually configured for this mode of operation For codes so configured the system will record live announcements and replay them as soon as the destination zones are available While making a delayed announcement status indications are as for a standard live announcement 1 e Amber Please Wait Green Talk Now After the operator has finished making the anno
54. is illuminated all paging activity from an associated will preclude operation of the PCU3 Note that a similar lamp illuminates on the RMP1 when the Ptt switch 1s operated 9 6 2 5 Power No Network Indicator At the top of the panel to the right of center is a Power Network indicator For the PCU3 to operate correctly this must be lit continuously If it is off the unit is not powered and if it is flashing it 1s not communicating with the Q Host or has not been correctly configured in the Q Host In this state the PCU will not respond to button presses Ensure that the indicator is lit continuously prior to using the PCU3 9 7 Using a PCUA Paging Station 9 7 1 Description Similar to the PCU2 the PCU4 is a paging station that permits an operator to initiate paging events involving one of 999 page codes An remote microphone may be associated with the PCUA to provide an additional point of paging control At the PCUA an operator can select a page code initiate an event and make spoken announcements via a microphone Each page code comprises two primary elements the first is the source of the page live page or recorded message and the second is the destination zone or group of zones to which the source will be directed When a valid page code has been selected pressing the Press to talk Ptt button will initiate a paging event Note that a page code may only have message sources if the system is fitted
55. lists all available SVC devices Select zone type Edit zone label svci Concourse EDITIO Main Concourse Main Concourse 5 1 Info Desk Information Desk Terminal A SVC2 Terminal B Standard Golden Wing Lounge Standard Food court Standard Gate Lounge 14 Standard Gate Lounge 15 Standard Gate Lounge 16 Standard Gate Lounge 17 Standard Gate Lounge 18 Standard Gate Lounge 19 Standard Gate Lounge 20 Standard Gate Lounge 21 Standard Gate Lounge 22 Standard Gate Lounge 23 Standard Gate Lounge 24 Standard Information Desk 5 1 Banquet Hall SCP Western Bar SCP Unused Unused Assign to zone Edit device details cn tw E V4 0US September 2004 Page 61 MediaMatrix 22 ControlMatrix User s Guide ControlMatrix Console Figure 5 17 Adding SVC devices add a new SVCI device to the system click the Edit device details button This will open the CA485 Device Manager New SVCI devices will appear in the SVC assignment pane once the CA485 Device Manager has been closed To assign an SVCI device to a paging zone select the paging zone from the list on the left side of the dialog and then select the SVCI device from the list on the SVC Allocation pane Each paging zone may have more than one SVCI assigned to it however each SVCI can be assigned to only one zone Click the Assign to zone button to make the assignment 5 9 3 SVC2 Zones
56. mask bit is 1 the addresses must match If the mask bit is 0 it is not tested Only packets that pass this matching test will be recognised by the computer An example will illustrate the point For this example assume the PC s IP address is 192 168 10 5 and initially the subnet mask is 255 255 255 0 x represents a don t care or doesn t matter condition and leading zeros have been retained in the decimal numbers IP address 192 168 010 005 11000000 10101000 00001010 00000101 Subnet mask 255 255 255 000 11111111 11111111 11111111 00000000 Matching subnet 11000000 10101000 00001010 xxxxxxxx For this case any computer with an IP address of 192 168 10 xxx i e 192 168 10 0 through to 192 168 10 255 shares the Subnet Thus 256 computers may exist on this Subnet This is due to the fact that the eight binary bits marked x in the Matching Subnet line are not tested In decimal these 8 binary bits represent 256 the number of computers that may share the Subnet If the Subnet Mask is now restricted to 255 255 255 248 the above will change to IP address 192 168 010 005 11000000 10101000 00001010 00000101 Subnet mask 255 255 255 248 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111000 Matching subnet 11000000 10101000 00001010 00000xxx With this restriction only three bits on the Matching Subnet line are not tested The decimal equivalent of three binary bits is eight so only eight computers can exist on this subnet and t
57. may exhibit RS485 problems CobraNet firmware in the CAB should be v2 8 8 or later Version numbers of Control firmware are sometimes shown on a label inside the CAB attached to the top of the EPROM However the only sure way to know CAB firmware is to use the Terminal Window in MediaMatrix type o on the keyboard for CobraNet type g to turn on debug type escape type h for hardware report under Cobra bobs there will be a line that indicates 80301 ver 1 X This is the CAB firmware revision There will also be a line for all CobraNet devices indicating CobraNet ver 2 x x This is the CobraNet firmware revision 4 3 3 What MWare versions support ControlMatrix At the current release of this document ControlMatrix is targeted specifically at MWare version 3 3 4 Earlier versions must not be used While earlier versions may appear to function subtle differences may cause difficulties Contact a MediaMatrix supplier for version update information MWare 3 3 4 or later can be downloaded free from http mediamatrix peavey com mware 32 bit cfm V4 0US September 2004 Page 38 MediaMatrix 22 ControlMatrix User s Guide Getting Started 4 4 Installing ControlMatrix Windows Client on a PC The ControlMatrix system can be managed remotely using ControlMatrix Windows Client CMWC running on one or more Windows compatible PCs The controlling PC or PCs must be loaded with CMWC software have TCP IP networking enabled an
58. means of filtering Filenames 5 13 2 Restore Configuration The Restore Configuration item in the Files menu provides a mechanism for retrieving the entire ControlMatrix system configuration from an archive file on the file system of the Q Host This facility means that a ControlMatrix system could be configured on one Q Host saved and then restored on another target Q Host Alternatively multiple snapshots could be taken of a system configuration and re used at a later time like a preset V4 0US September 2004 Page 72 MediaMatrix 22 ControlMatrix User s Guide ControlMatrix Console v Oy x 4096 Dec 10 10 32 system ctg 19589 Jun 05 16 28 Filename system cfg Pattem Figure 5 26 Configuration restoration dialog To restore the system configuration from an archive file select the Restore Configuration item in the Files menu Use the Restore System Configuration file selection dialog box to locate the configuration archive file Alternatively enter the path and name of the archive into the Filename text box The Pattern text box provides a means of filtering Filenames To perform the restoration click the Restore button 5 13 3 Restore today s yesterday s this week s last week s last months The Q Host will automatically save the current system configuration each day in a configuration archive It preserves copies of this archive that represent the state of the system configuration today yesterday this week
59. not change until the node is actually rebooted The second icon is called System Edits It allows the critical system files displayed above to be edited This command actually performs some of the commands outlined above and makes the results available in a series of files together with the files that need to be edited A total of five files are displayed Navigate the files using the lt F5 gt forward and lt F6 gt back function keys The first file shows the MAC addresses of the two Ethernet ports in the machine These may be cut from the file using lt F9 gt to start a highlight the cursor keys to highlight an area of text and then lt AIt E gt for edit and C for copy Use lt F5 gt and or lt F6 gt keys to move to the netmap file and paste using lt Alt E gt then P for paste Note that the MAC addresses for the other nodes will need to be added using the procedures outlined earlier The second file contains the lines needed to start the networking properly on this node These lines need to be cut and pasted into the sysinit file The third file is the netmap file It is initially empty and should eventually contain the node numbers and MAC addresses for all nodes in the system The fourth file is the sysinit n file The actual file loaded will change with the logical node number Be sure to edit the file for the new node number you are creating not the old node number if the node number is changing V4 0US Septembe
60. of the zones assigned to this PCU currently has paging activity from some other source but at a priority that would allow a page from this PCU to go out However the page from the other source would be lost to those zones required by this PCU Delay This display indicates that at least one of the zones assigned to this code has paging activity at a priority equal to or higher than the priority of this paging code In a system with store and forward capability a page made now from this PCU would be delayed and released when the busy zones become available In a system without store and forward a page made now from this PCU will be lost hence the user should delay making the page until the Delay message is gone N A This display indicates that the selected code is not accessible to this PCU4 It will be accompanied by ether a Code Barred or Undefined Code display in Region 2 of the LCD V4 0US September 2004 Page 163 MediaMatrix 22 ControlMatrix User s Guide Using Devices Please Wait This display indicates that the Ptt button has been pressed and one or more of three conditions exists the preamble is currently playing e the zones are being set up e there is some delay in the system waiting for resources e g a wave player This display will usually correspond to illumination of the amber Wait LED and indicates that the operator should wait for the Talk Now display before making an announcement Req
61. preamble bells but when I speak into the microphone nothing is heard or the sound is fragmented a The microphone or lead is faulty and must be fixed or replaced b There is a problem with the audio circuitry in the PCUS that must be repaired c Check the audio connection between the PCU3 and the CAB d Ifit is at an RMPI check the audio interconnection between the and the PCU3 V4 0US September 2004 Page 189 MediaMatrix 22 ControlMatrix User s Guide Debugging 10 3 9 9 I have a problem with a PCU4 or PCUA operation is very similar a PCU2 See also Sections 10 3 9 I have a problem with a PCU and 10 3 9 7 I have a problem with a PCU2 in addition to the PCUA specific items below The busy indicator never goes off and I can t use the panel f Check that the microphone switch on the accompanying RMP1 has not been locked on by some means g The switch on the microphone is faulty or damaged h The microphone cable is damaged and needs to be repaired i Damaged faulty interconnecting control cable between PCU4 and the j The PCU4 or RMPI is faulty and needs to be serviced At times I cannot make an event selection d If the accompanying is using the PCU4 the busy indicator will be on and the display will read Active During this time it is not possible to alter the selection e PCUA 15 offline Power Network LED is flashing see Section 10 3 7 10 A CA485
62. present on the field input V4 0US September 2004 To mute the background while the assignment is active click the Mute Backgnd button to make it active To duck background on signal presence click the Duck on Signal button These buttons are mutually exclusive To specify the destination paging zones for the input assignment select the zones by name from the Available Zones list and then click the Add button The selected zones will appear in the Destination Zones list To select a contiguous group of zones click on the first zone in the range and then while holding down the Shift key click on the last zone in the range To select multiple zones at random hold down the Ctrl key and click on the desired zone names Select one zone at a time simply by clicking on the zone in the Available Zones list To remove unwanted zones from the Destination Zones list select them using the techniques described in the previous paragraph then click the Remove button Once the input assignment event has been configured click on the Apply button to schedule the event Clicking the Done button will have the same effect and will also close the Scheduler Configuration dialog Page 104 MediaMatrix 22 ControlMatrix User s Guide ControlMatrix Console 6 4 2 Schedule Preview Dialog The Scheduler Preview Dialog Figure 6 20 accessible via the Scheduling menu provides facilities to peruse the current schedule for a particular day The calendar cont
63. processing to deliver average levels on a VU meter or average responding meter at around 20dBFS digital 12 2 3 Message Content and Delivery Employ voice talent experienced with announcements for public spaces As it is likely that recorded messages may be heard regularly a spoken style that does not become monotonous with repetition is important A pleasant natural delivery is desirable If messages of different importance or context are being recorded consider varying the style of delivery using different speakers or speakers of different gender The rate of speech must be appropriate for the acoustic space in which the message will be replayed Acoustically dead spaces such as small dressing rooms in performance venues can handle a higher speaking rate than the cavernous and very live long reverberation time public foyer areas Messages for very large venues stadia concert halls may require a very slow rate of speech delivery Some recommendations for effective messages e Ensure that the meaning is clear and unambiguous Minimize the need for interpretation to derive message meaning Remember that the context of a message may affect meaning Remember that cultural diversity among the target audience can affect meaning Capture attention before delivering content Brief messages tend to be best at communicating If message phrases are recorded for later assembly into sentences using ControlMatrix sequencing facilities care need
64. selectable on an individual message basis Log Alarms fully annotated log and alarm functions to monitor system integrity Scheduling of any combination of messages backgrounds and User Inputs Schedule by actual time date or nominate a day s of week with start time stop time and repeat interval e Configuration of message assembly elements and parameters 3 5 2 ControlMatrix Setup ControlMatrix Setup facilitates configuration of system parameters for a particular ControlMatrix System It must be used at initial installation and subsequently can be re run to make modifications or upgrades The primary function of Setup 15 to ensure that ControlNet knows about the physical topology of a particular system So that all necessary set up steps are addressed ControlMatrix Setup includes a wizard that guides users through required processes V4 0US September 2004 Page 26 MediaMatrix lt p ControlMatrix User s Guide ControlMatrix Elements V4 0US September 2004 Page 27 MediaMatrix 0 E vs 4 Getting Started Introduction MediaMatrix 22 ControlMatrix User s Guide Getting Started 4 1 Where do I start So you have this great new ControlMatrix system in boxes How do you turn it into a running system This chapter provides the most basic information you will need to install a system and bring it to life More detailed information can be found throughout this manual see Chapter 8 for more information about installin
65. shutdown the Q Host first To shutdown the Q Host select the Shutdown system item from the System menu 5 14 6 Switch to Wizard Mode Wizard mode presents each of the ControlMatrix system configuration dialogs in a logical sequence Next and Back buttons are used to navigate the sequence of dialogs The wizard also provides relevant explanatory notes at each stage to assist with configuration To start ControlMatrix Setup in wizard mode select the Switch to Wizard mode menu item from the System menu Setup will switch immediately to wizard mode and will continue to start up in wizard mode until instructed to do otherwise 5 147 System Time The System Time dialog can be accessed at any time from the System menu See Section 5 11 for more details V4 0US September 2004 Page 74 MediaMatrix lt p ControlMatrix User s Guide ControlMatrix Console 5 14 8 Licenses The ControlMatrix Licensing dialog can be accessed at any time from the System menu by clicking the Licenses item See Section 5 2 for more details 5 14 9System Preferences Announcement Replay After Emergency Interruption ControlMatrix provides a feature whereby pages that are interrupted by a subsequent page of the highest priority an emergency page can be replayed automatically after completion of the emergency page Implementation of this feature dictates that all live announcements be recorded in their entirety to the Store and Forward system It follows that en
66. specify the user input to be used as the audio source for the assignment It also defines the destination paging zones The assignment will occur at the time specified on the Timing tab Active Events User Input Event Event Label assign to Gates Description State 2 Timi ii Eventis Disabled Baggage ance 5 Message Enabled Enable BGM at 10 Background Enabled Available inputs Priorit Mute Backgnd input Room 23 North comer X puck on Signal Available Zones Destination Zones Golden Wing Lounge Main Concourse Food court Terminal A Gate Lounge 14 Terminal B Gate Lounge 15 Gate Lounge 16 Gate Lounge 17 Gate Lounge 18 Gate Lounge 19 Gate Lounge 20 m Scheduleris Enabled Apply Figure 6 19 Setting a User Input as an Audio Source To define the input assignment first select the field input from the Available Inputs drop down list V4 0US September 2004 Page 103 MediaMatrix 22 ControlMatrix User s Guide ControlMatrix Console There is a paging priority associated with each input assignment that determines the ability of other paging sources to override the input assignment Select the desired priority level from the Priority drop down list The input assignment can be configured to mute any background audio routed to the destination paging zones or the background can be ducked when signal is
67. sure that the IP Addresses of the two machines are set the Subnet Masks are set and that there is a route between the two machines Try using the standard windows Ping command see Windows Help and Section 10 1 2 to see that the two machines can talk to each other 4 Check that the MediaMatrx has the RATC enabled MediaMatrix Tools Options Remote Services V4 0US September 2004 Page 35 MediaMatrix 22 ControlMatrix User s Guide Getting Started 5 Using the standard Windows Telnet utility see Windows Help from the MediaMatrix check that you can connect to the MediaMatrix RATC by Telnetting into port 1632 The standard login of Defaultuser with no password should return a welcome prompt from the MediaMatrix There should also be an indication in the MediaMatrix terminal window that a connection has been made 4 2 Making a ControlMatrix View File 4 2 1 Control Matrix View File Devices It is intended that all of the ControlMatrix view file devices will be included in a future release of MWare When this occurs this step will be unnecessary Check the M Ware Devices menu and help system If ControlMatrix devices are available proceed to 4 2 2 if not continue with this section The installation CD supplied with a ControlMatrix system includes a folder called ControlMatrix that contains all of the special devices required for a ControlMatrix View File Before building a ControlMatrix View File this folder must be
68. system input It is very similar to the pane used for SCP devices Figure 5 15 To add a new TPU device to the system click the Edit telephone devices button This will open the Telephone Paging Unit Manager New TPU devices will appear in the drop down list on the Input Device Details pane once the Telephone Paging Unit Manager has been closed V4 0US September 2004 Page 59 ControlMatrix User s Guide ControlMatrix Console MediaMatrix 22 connect TPU device to a system input select the system input from the list on the left side of the dialog and then select the corresponding TPU from the drop down list Current assignments are displayed in the Device column in the system inputs list A Telephone system input must be connected to only one TPU 5 9 Zone Attributes Configuration Dialog The Zone Attributes Configuration Dialog Figure 5 16 is used to define the paging zones available to the ControlMatrix system It is used to give each zone a meaningful label and then categorize each zone by type Zones are numbered 1 to 200 A paging zone can be one of four types Standard SVC1 SVC2 and SCP SVC1 SVC2 and SCP zones must be associated with physical wall mounted controller devices These devices are defined using the CA485 Device Manager Display signs may be assigned to a zone of any type A display sign must be assigned to only one zone Select zone type Edit zone label SVC1 Main Concourse Zone No Zone
69. text on the display signs click the Scrolling button on the Text pane For fixed text click the Fixed button To display the text using red characters click the red button below the Specify text color label For green text click the green button For amber text click the amber button Active Events Recorded Message Event Event Label Baggage ance 5 Timing Destination Sequence Eventis Enabled Message textis Enabled Specify text colour Specify text display mode Y New Delete Duplicate Scheduleris Enabled Figure 6 17 Text Attributes Dialog V4 0US September 2004 Page 101 MediaMatrix 2 2 ControlMatrix User s Guide ControlMatrix Console Background Events The event scheduler can be used to alter the background source assigned to a list of paging zones at a particular time on a given day Events of this type will override any background assignments made from the Background Allocation dialog The process for configuration of this type of event is similar to that used for Recorded Message events The background event must be given a unique label Use the text box in the upper right corner of the configuration pane to change the event label The next step is to specify the event timing parameters The Timing tab is used for this purpose A particular background event can only occur once on a given day It is therefore only necessary to specify a s
70. text window Each system server reports progress error conditions and device status by writing to the System Log The viewer operates in two modes The Update mode shows new entries to the log as they arrive The viewer text window scrolls to reveal the new entries In Browse mode text window scrolling is prevented allowing uninterrupted viewing of particular log entries V4 0US September 2004 Page 118 MediaMatrix 22 ControlMatrix User s Guide ControlMatrix Console Viewing Mode Browse wv Update mmratc 18999 Attempting connection to RATCs snmpman 13913 Node waudeu2 is offline snmpman 13913 Started snmpman 13913 Node waudeu2 is online 4855 CABNW1 23567 Started on ethernet 2 4855 CABNW1 23567 NIC is 00 01 02 5 855 CABNW1 23567 Succesfully registered with Net 4855 CABNW1 23567 CABS configured ratc for 485 4855 CABNW1 23567 Spawning scpsry CABNW1 4855 CABNW1 23567 5 1 60 OFFLINE 4855 CABNW1 23567 5 1 61 OFFLINE 4855 23567 Spawning pcusru CABNW1 4855 CABNW1 23567 2 83 OFFLINE 4855 23567 Spawning syc2sry CABNW1 suc2sru CABNW1 2736 Started suc2sru CABNW1 2736 Expecting 2 suc2 devices s suc2sru CABNW1 2736 Expecting 3 suc1 devices s 855 CABNW1 23567 S C2 95 OFFLINE ca4eSsru CABNW1 23567 50 1 167 OFFLINE ca485sru CABNW1 23567 S C1 80 OFFLINE
71. the day of the week then the month using the drop down list boxes provided Finally enter the time of day at which daylight saving will become active To specify an abbreviation for daylight saving time enter a three or four character abbreviation in the text box labeled Daylight Saving to the right of the Abbreviation heading To save the changes made to a particular time zone click the Apply button At this point the recently created time zone will be made available on the Set the time pane To remove a time zone from the database select the time zone from the drop down list then click on the Remove button 5 12 User Manager The User Manager is used to create new ControlMatrix users and to edit the details of existing users The User Manager also provides a mechanism for changing the password of a particular user It can also be used to change the privileges of a user by changing the group that user belongs to Finally it allows the Administrator to remove users that are no longer required V4 0US September 2004 Page 69 MediaMatrix 22 ControlMatrix User s Guide ControlMatrix Console 5 13 User No Usemame amp dministrator User Administrator root Descriptio DefaultUser Grou root 76 Fred Administrative user Figure 5 24 User Manager To create a new user click on the Add button Type the username for the new user into the text entry box that appears once the Add button is
72. the entire sequence of messages in a periodic manner every ten minutes for example the first line should read The event will repeat every minutes Enter the appropriate repetition interval in minutes in the text box or use the up and down arrow controls For Recorded Message events To play one message from the sequence periodically on a rotational basis The event will play one msg every minutes Enter the appropriate repetition interval in minutes or use the up and down arrow controls The event can be configured to trigger between certain hours of the day To specify a start and finish time enter the hours and minutes in twenty four hour format into the appropriate text boxes Alternatively use the up and down arrow controls to set the time Events that occur only once do not require a finish time The next task is to define the days on which the event will be active This can be particular days of the week or particular days of the month Day of the week Events To define an event that occurs on particular day of the week check the Day of week button Select the active days of the week from the first list box More than one day can be selected Use the Shift key to select a range of days or the Ctrl key to select days at random If the event will occur every day select only the first item in the list day V4 0US September 2004 Page 97 MediaMatrix 22 ControlMatrix User s Guide ControlMatrix Console Active Ev
73. the green button For amber text click the amber button V4 0US September 2004 Page 85 MediaMatrix 22 ControlMatrix User s Guide ControlMatrix Console Copy and Paste Page Codes A mechanism has been provided that allows page codes to be copied from one page code and pasted to another The source and destination page codes can be either four button paging station codes or global codes A facility for clearing a selected page code is also provided These features are available from a floating menu accessed by clicking with the right mouse button on the page code tree list on the left side of the dialog To copy a page code select the particular code from the tree structure showing the list of page codes or using the page code selection controls on the right side pane Page Code text box and up and down buttons Right click on the page code tree list to reveal the floating menu Select the Copy item Then select the destination page code by either selecting it from the page code tree using the mouse cursor or by using the page code selection controls as before This could be an existing page code or one that has not yet been configured Finally reveal the floating menu again by right clicking on the page code tree list and choose the Paste item All aspects of the original page code s configuration will be duplicated in the new page code the only exception being the page code description The description should be replaced with suitable text
74. the recorded message or list sequence of messages select messages in the Available Messages list and then click the Add button This will add the selected messages to the Sequence of Messages list To remove a message from the Sequence of Messages list first select the message then click the Remove button Messages are played in the order they appear in the Sequence of Messages list from top to bottom To alter the order in which the sequence of recorded messages will be played use the Promote and Demote buttons To advance a message one place towards the start of the sequence select the message and click the Promote button To send the message one place towards the end of the sequence click the Demote button To request that a preamble be played prior to an announcement from a paging station check the Play Preamble button This option will not be available in a system that does not have MessageNet installed Text Display To enable text display while paging from a PCU on associated signage check the Enable Text button below the Priority selection list box This will enable the Text Attributes tab that can be used to gain access to the Text Attributes pane V4 0US September 2004 Page 84 MediaMatrix 22 ControlMatrix User s Guide ControlMatrix Console Paging Stations Priorit Description t flow eon E Four Button Paging Stations Page Code 001 Low 5 SEO ERIE BK PCUT Gate Lounge 13 7 Enable Text 7 Play preamb
75. to speech voices must first be installed on the C Host as part of the Speechify Text to Speech engine They must also be installed in ControlMatrix Setup before becoming available for selection V4 0US September 2004 Page 115 ControlMatrix User s Guide ControlMatrix Console 6 6 4 Courtesy Zone Selection A courtesy sequence must have at least one or more destination zones selected The zone selection page of the dialog is shown in Figure 6 27 To add zones press the Add gt gt button to add selected zones from the Available List to the Destination List To remove a zone from the Destination List press Remove lt lt To select a contiguous group of zones click on the first zone in the range and then while holding down the Shift key click on the last zone in the range To select multiple zones at random hold down the Ctrl key and click on the desired zone names Twenty minute arriv MasterSystem Main Concourse i El Main Concourse MasterSystem Terminal E Terminal 8 MasterSystem Gate Lounge 13 EJ Terminal i B Golden Wing Lounge Food Court Gate Lounge 13 B Gate Lounge 14 E Gate Lounge 15 Gate Lounge 16 Gate Lounge 17 Figure 6 27 Destination zones for a courtesy sequence 6 6 5 Saving the Courtesy Configuration To save the courtesy configuration press the Apply button V4 0US September 2004 Page 116 MediaMatrix 22 ControlMatrix User s Guide ControlMatrix Console
76. types have a screw on cover in the center of the front panel Behind it is a set of switches used to set the CAB Address Each CAB in a system must have a unique address so that it can be identified in the View File CABs are shipped with the number set to 0000 and will consequently need to be re set as they are being installed If the View File is already prepared the addresses should be set to match it If the View File is not defined the addresses should be set and recorded for later inclusion See also MediaMatrix CAB documentation 8 3 7 Setting up a PCU 2100 Power Supply Power Supply Setup The PCU 2100 Load Sharing Redundant Power Supply operates in one of two modes Dual or Redundant A rear panel switch allows the installer to determine the operating mode of the PCU 2100 while a front panel LED provides visual status for the user When operating in Redundant Mode the PCU 2100 provides power supply outputs for up to eight PCU Series paging stations and up to ten remote control panels and any failure of a primary supply module will automatically engage the second supply module without interruption In Dual Mode the second bank can be fully loaded thereby doubling the capacity of the PCU 2100 for applications that do not require redundancy Each bank includes a fault output connector for interfacing external alarms or signaling equipment A front panel Fault LED provides visual status to the user Most LEDs are bicolor with green indi
77. use only one Choose Network 1 as this corresponds to the qhostl CABNWLI network in ControlMatrix Setup The additional networks are for large systems that have the CobraNet split into multiple VLANs Next to be considered are the 5560 MessageNet card connections and telephone paging if required in the system At the bottom of the main ControlMatrix view file device there are connections for S560 MessageNet cards and for Telephone paging outputs Wire these devices to MM I O blocks as appropriate for your installation The S560 MessageNet wiring enters grouped in eight channels from a bundle receiver that communicates directly with a S560 MessageNet card The output wiring is sent grouped as four channels to a MediaMatrix bundle transmitter each S560 card can record four channels Telephone paging wiring 1s general purpose and goes via CABs Wire the inputs from the Telephone Paging Unit as you would wire a PCU or Background source There are dedicated outputs in the lower part of the ControlMatrix device which should be wired to the bundle transmitter to a CAB that connects to the return audio path on the TPU Wire TPU Return Output 1 in the view file to the TPU number one left hand column not the address in the TPU setup dialog Continue for additional units in order On completion Save and Compile and the View File will be ready for use 4 2 3 Making the View File Run from Boot For a MediaMatrix system to start without user interventio
78. wav Figure 6 17 Message Sequence Selection V4 0US September 2004 Page 100 MediaMatrix 22 ControlMatrix User s Guide ControlMatrix Console Select messages from the Available Messages list and then click the Add button to make these messages part of the sequence To remove messages from the sequence select them in the Sequence of Messages list and click the Remove button Itis possible to change the order of the messages in the sequence To advance a message towards the start of the sequence select it then click the Promote button The message will be promoted one position each time the Promote button is pressed Similarly a message can be shifted towards the end of the list using the Demote button Once all the announcement event parameters have been configured click the Apply button to save the event and put it into action Clicking the Done button will have the same effect but will in addition close the Schedule Configuration Dialog Displaying Text During an Announcement Finally the Text tab is used to enable the display of relevant text messages on associated signage while the sequence of recorded announcements is played The text displayed will be that associated with each file using the Text Association tab of the Message Manager dialog To enable text display while a scheduled recorded announcement is played click the button on the Text pane so that the button label shows Enabled To display scrolling
79. with the MessageNet option V4 0US September 2004 Page 160 MediaMatrix lt p ControlMatrix User s Guide Using Devices 9 7 2 Operation A PCUA is a wall mounted control unit with the following features Hand held microphone with Press to talk switch Status indicators Wait and Go Busy indicator Keypad LCD Display Power No Network Indicator These features combine to allow an operator complete control of paging functions 9 7 2 1 Microphone A sensitive noise canceling hand held microphone is provided on the PCU4 front panel for spoken announcements The microphone is fitted with a Press to talk switch see below The paging microphone is stored on a clip mounted on the right side of the panel When preparing to make a page slide the microphone upwards out of the clip and place it in the palm of the hand with fingers or thumb on the Ptt switch For correct speech quality the microphone must be used very close to the mouth The small rubber strip on the top of the microphone must be rested on the face above the upper lip during use Gently replace the microphone in the clip after use Warning Poor sound quality will result if the PCU4 microphone is not used at very close proximity to the mouth 9 7 2 2 Press to talk Switch Status indicators The Press to talk switch is located on the side of the microphone Functionally associated with the switch are two Status indicators mounted on the PCU4
80. zones at random hold down the Ctrl key while making selections Recorded Message To set up the attributes of a recorded message first ensure that the Enable Messages button has been checked This will enable the Message List tab permitting access to the recorded message selection controls See Figure 6 3 NOTE The Enable Message button will not be available for ControlMatrix systems that do not have MessageNet installed V4 0US September 2004 Page 83 Paging Stations EF Four Button Paging Stations B Gate Lounge 13 PCUI Gate Lounge 17 PCUS Info Counter f PCU3 Gate Lounge 42 BS Keypad Paging Stations E Global Codes Gate lounges Terminal page 1 6 PCU Main Concourse PCU2 Check In Desk if at 0 i at 1 Gear page code Page Timeout 120 secs ControlMatrix User s Guide ControlMatrix Console MediaMatrix 22 Priorit Description Page Code 003 aj Low Baggage Message Paging Message Jest Zone List nunbntez Available Messages Enable Text L4 Play preamble 7 Enable Messages Delayed release Sequence of Messages D alarmbells wav alarmtest wav O baggagebelt wav D cimonitors wav D courtesy wav 3 emergency wav D evacuate wav flightinfo way D security wav D smoking wayv Promote Demote cm waves baggage wawv Figure 6 3 Setup of Recorded Message Announcements To specify
81. 04 Page 225 MediaMatrix 22 ControlMatrix User s Guide Advanced Topics 12 8 Telnet Access Paging Control TAPC TAPC Telnet Access Paging Control is the remote control mechanism for ControlMatrix paging systems A text based command set allows configuration and execution of a number of key ControlMatrix system functions via a Telnet interface The following functions are available via the TAPC interface e Initiation of a live page to a list of specified destination paging zones e Playback of a sequence of pre recorded announcements to a list of specified destination paging zones Text to speech segments may be interspersed with pre recorded announcements e A text string may be specified that will be displayed for the duration of the paging event A nominated PCU may be prevented from making pages Details of the command set are available in a separate document TAPC Protocol Definition available from the ControlMatrix Resource Page http mm peavey com cm V4 0US September 2004 Page 226 MediaMatrix lt p ControlMatrix User s Guide Advanced Topics V4 0US September 2004 Page 227 MediaMatrix ve Is Glossary ControlMatrix User s Guide Glossary Word MediaMatrix 22 Meaning Active Code s Refers to keypad paging stations those page codes that have been configured for use by a particular PCU2 PCU4 or PCUS Other codes are barred from use Active input
82. 10 Configuration Error LOG SWARE 0x0020 Unexpected software fault LOG CFG CHG 0x0040 Configuration Change LOG PAGE ERR 0x0080 Paging error e g timeout LOG OP 0x0100 Operator activity e g SCP LOG DEBUG 0x0200 Development debugging LOG COMMS 0x0400 Interprocess communications error LOG 485 0x0800 485 communications error LOG SCHED 0x1000 Scheduled activity Table 12 1 Table of log entry types Many entries fall into more than one category This is legitimate When a log entry is generated by system activity the active classifications are associated with the log entry and delivered to the system log server This server then writes the log entry to all active logs that are configured to receive entries of that classification It is possible to configure additional logs for specific purposes However the standard log must be retained to maintain functionality of the ControlMatrix Console log viewer This log normally receives all log entries regardless of classification although it is possible to limit the entries to particular classifications 12 1 2 Basic Procedure for Setting up Logs V4 0US September 2004 Page 199 MediaMatrix 22 ControlMatrix User s Guide Advanced Topics The standard file that defines the system logs is cm config logfiles The default contents of this file are shown below The lines beginning with a are ignored by the system and are used to more clearly explain what is meant by the a
83. 12V Power Supply Figure 8 4 Examples of PCU 2100 AHCI Alarm Connections Figure 8 4 shows two examples of connecting the fault outputs of a PCU 2100 to an AHCI Alarm Card The example on the left is self powered from the PCU 2100 producing a separate alarm for each bank on alarm Inputs 5 and 6 The diagram on the right produces a single alarm on Input 4 if either supply fails using an external supply Nothing in these drawings is polarity sensitive RS485 Setup The PCU 2100 power supply incorporates an active RS485 repeater to facilitate effective RS485 networking The repeater comprises two independent banks of five RS485 ports each Each bank is driven by the RS485 port of a MediaMatrix CAB conveying data from the Q Host via the CobraNet The CAB is also used to convey responses from devices on the RS485 network back to the Q Host The total number of devices connected to a repeater bank must not exceed eight PCUs and ten wallplates in keeping with the total number of devices that the PCU 2100 power supply can support per PCU 2100 bank PCUs and wallplate devices may be connected to any port of the repeater however it is recommended that each port drive at most two home run cables Where more than two devices need to be cabled to a particular port a daisy chain topology should be employed The two repeater banks in a PCU 2100 support three modes of operation LINKED INDEPENDENT and REDUNDANT LINKED mode is the default mode
84. 18 ahost2 COM1 EF200 line Telephone input 18 ahost2 COM2 TPU2 line 6 TPU on Input ahost2 COM2 TPU2 line TPU on input 8 Figure 5 12 TPU configuration The TPUI EF200 type TPUs must then be assigned an address between 0 and 31 This address corresponds to that set on the DIP switches on the unit itself No two TPUI V4 0US September 2004 Page 55 MediaMatrix 22 ControlMatrix User s Guide ControlMatrix Console EF200 s on the same serial port can have the same address To specify the address of the TPU type it into the text box provided TPU2 and TPU4 types will automatically be assigned address according to the number of channels required two for a TPU2 and four for a TPU4 A four digit PIN is used to enable secure access to a particular TPU channel To specify the PIN enter the four digits into the text box provided Finally enter a descriptive label that can be used to identify each channel It will not be possible to proceed until all the fields have been completed To remove one or a number of TPUs from the system select them by clicking on the appropriate items in the telephone paging unit list and then click the Remove Devices button To select a range of units select the first item in the range and then while holding down the Shift key select the last item in the range To select multiple TPUs at random hold down the Ctrl key while selecting the items to be removed one by one When a TPU2 or TPUA device is se
85. 3 Setting up TPU2 TPU4 Telephone Paging Units TPU2 and TPU4 Telephone Paging Units allow two or four telephone paging lines per unit to the added to a ControlMatrix system Up to four TPU2 or TPU4 units can be chained together effectively providing up to 16 phone ports V4 0US September 2004 Page 136 MediaMatrix 22 ControlMatrix User s Guide Installation Reference A TPU2 requires two audio inputs and two audio outputs from the system TPUA requires four audio inputs and four audio outputs from the system Audio Phone Cabling Phone lines should be attached to the ports labeled Line on the rear panel Do not connect anything to the Phone ports The TPU2 4 requires audio inputs and outputs from the ControlMatrix system for voice prompts and paging The audio connectors used on the TPU2 4 3 81mm pluggable screw types and are labeled Inputs and Outputs on the rear panel The user s manual contains information on the pinouts An appropriate cable is 22ga foil shield polyethylene insulation PVC jacket Belden 8761 or equivalent Q Host Communications A TPU2 4 has two serial ports one on the front panel and one on the rear panel The port on the front panel 1s a standard D9 female type A null modem cable should be used to connect this port to the Q Host The rear panel has a 3 81mm pluggable screw type connector Information on pinouts can be found in the TPU2 4 User s Manual For a multiple dev
86. A User input that has been assigned to a paging zone and is currently in use or assignments available for use Active period How long an assignment remains active A Host A centrally located box that houses 5560 MessageNet cards for advanced recorded messaging requirements Alarm panel Another term for Alarms Dialog Alarms Dialog Displays a list of system alarms of a certain pre defined type tabs for selecting the type of alarms to display and controls for enabling the alarm buzzer and alarm panel popup Announcement A message or a live page Apply Pressing this button in any dialog makes the changes that have been made take effect but does not close the dialog Assignment Allocation of a source e g background user inputs to one or more destinations paging zones Auto transformer A special type of audio transformer used for adjusting volume level on constant voltage loudspeaker circuits Available Codes Refers to keypad paging stations those page codes that have been configured for use by any keypad paging station in the system They must be made active before they can be used Available Inputs User inputs that are available for assignment to paging zones Available Recorded message available for use in a sequence recorded messages available Messages for playback Available Zones A paging zone that is available for allocation by the system Background An audio program that may b
87. Communications with the Q Host is via 485 SVC2 As SVCI but allows selection of one of four 70V or 100V speaker feeds each carrying a different background program Also an SVC2 has an onboard autotransformer System or ControlMatrix System A collection of ControlMatrix Hardware with one Q Host with or without a redundant spare See also Network System Alarms An indication of whether a particular system component is operating properly or not System Input A reference to a physical audio input to the ControlMatrix system System Log A time stamped record of significant activity in the ControlMatrix system It includes normal activity and error conditions System Log viewer A dialog accessible from ControlMatrix Console Diagnostics menu used to browse and search the system log Terminate Servers Stop the servers running on the Q Host see Servers Timing Section of the scheduler that permits event activation to be programmed against a clock and or calendar Text to Speech Automatic generation of synthesized speech from text The synthesis 18 performed using complex software algorithms based upon actual human speech components In ControlMatrix this technology is employed for Courtesy messages TTS Text to Speech see above Update mode Allows viewing of new entries to the log as they arrive The viewer text window log viewer scrol
88. ControINet Subnet or the CobraNet Subnet Make sure this is the case Verify that the device is connected to a network switch that is operational and has connectivity to the appropriate Subnet 485 device is offline Check that power supply to the device Check the RS485 cabling to the device V4 0US September 2004 Page 184 MediaMatrix lt p ControlMatrix User s Guide Debugging c Ifthe RS485 network is connected to the Q Host via a CAB make sure it is online and that it shows RS485 activity on its front panel LED If not see Section 10 3 10 I have a problem with RS485 over CABs d Make sure the device has the correct address set on its DIP switches 10 3 8 I have a problem with a wall mounted controller 10 3 8 1 The controller has its power network indicator flashing The controller is offline This means the controller is not able to detect the presence of a CA485 network The device is offline See Section 10 3 7 10 A 485 device is offline 10 3 8 2 The controller is online but it is not responding to button presses a Check that the controller has been added to the list of devices in the Device Manager dialog box in ControlMatrix Setup b Make sure the device has the correct address set on its DIP switches 10 3 8 3 I have a problem with an SVCI Doesn t go to full volume during a page a Make sure the SVCI has been assigned to the correct zone using the Zone Attributes dialog in ControlMatr
89. In the root directory of each node is a text file called licenses To display this file use vedit by executing the command vedit licenses The contents of this file may look something like this the values have been altered so these codes are invalid qnx 00391981 1055 20e1 511c 4680 38d3 1 node phrt 00317050 1p4y aln0 j50c 0s11 10b7 1 node tcprt 00298176 1w63 5418 5680 4001 c098 1 node V4 0US September 2004 Page 210 MediaMatrix 22 ControlMatrix User s Guide Advanced Topics Each line of this file is a single QNX license When additional nodes are purchased additional QNX licenses are supplied Adding these codes to the file will enable the QNX network to grow in size and thus accept larger node numbers Add the required additional license codes to the file observing the file syntax When all of the additional license codes have been added press lt ALT X gt and choose Save to save the file and quit the editor To inform the system that new licenses have been added execute the command license r To show how many valid licenses exist on the system use the command licinfo a These licenses must be added to the licenses file on each node in the system by using the editor on each node using the procedure described above Setting the node number Since every node is shipped as node 1 and every node on the network needs a different node number it will be necessary to change the node number of each addition
90. Local Area Connections Click on the Properties box and look for an item labeled Internet Protocol TCP IP Again select the Properties button and check that the radio button Use the following IP address is selected If an IP address is not already set one must be entered For information about choosing IP addresses see Section 5 3 Record the number you have chosen as it will be required later when configuring the system using ControlNet Setup Windows will also require a Subnet Mask Set this to 255 255 255 0 and leave the Default Gateway entry blank Also leave blank both entries for the DNS server Press the various OK and Close buttons until you are back at the Windows desktop Select Start Settings ControlPanel Users and Passwords and confirm that there is a default user login ControlMatrix uses the DefaultUser login for remote control so make sure that this user is not disallowed or deleted Open Windows Explorer then use it to locate the c Program Files Media Matrix MWare folder Locate the file named PA ini and right click on it Select Open with and then select Notepad from the application list If they do not already exist add the following two lines to the end of the file V4 0US September 2004 Page 32 MediaMatrix lt p ControlMatrix User s Guide Getting Started CobraNet UseDynavar TRUE Save the file and close Notepad and Explorer If you have installed or upgraded to MWare 3 3 5 or higher this step wil
91. MediaMatrix LB pv ControlMatrix User s Manual Version 4 0US September 2004 MediaMatrix 22 ControlMatrix User s Guide Table of Contents PE USATE 8 eec eoe tc 9 1 2 A Typical ControlMatrix System eee 9 4498 Central Equipment 11 1 4 11 ToS T GUIAS Sese 11 124 2 uo Olas wei oa esata 11 NALS ERR 12 T1244 NONWOUKS 5d 12 1 5 Where Front 12 2 ControlMatrix Concepts MN uerius 15 2 2 Eno T yo nnmnnn nnmnnn nenna 15 2 3 Dennition of a 15 2 4 nenne 15 2 9 MessagiNg 15 2 6 Paging Priority 2 202 16 2 6 1 Ifthe second paging event is lower priority than the first 16 2 6 2 If the second paging event is the same priority as the first
92. NUN al o EA 4 From Paging Stations Audio In over CobraNet MediaMatrix Audio Out over CobraNet To Zones Background 7 with CobraNet DSP Sources Figure 3 1 Interaction between ControlMatrix hosts and the MediaMatrix 3 2 4 Central Equipment Hardware Packaging ControlMatrix systems are packaged according to the dimensions or scale of a particular system A basic system will comprise a MediaMatrix and a Q Host with or without MessageNet components installed Such a system will handle up to 32 paging stations and 64 zones If MessageNet is installed the basic system will provide simultaneously four channels of message recording and eight channels of message playback V4 0US September 2004 Page 22 MediaMatrix 22 ControlMatrix User s Guide ControlMatrix Elements For larger scale systems the Q Host will be supplemented with one or more A Hosts each of which will be fitted with one or two 5560 cards Each additional 560 card will provide simultaneously further four channels of message recording and eight channels of message playback This configuration suits systems up to the limits of a single fully loaded MediaMatrix frame typically 144 inputs and 200 zones dependant on available DSP other system requirements and CobraNet network design with as many channels of message store and simultaneous message playback as required Very large systems requirin
93. Page Inhibit Below the volume buttons there is Page Inhibit button When on indicator lit all paging to the SCP zone will be blocked In a typical application this button may be used to prevent of paging messages interrupting a conference within the zone Note that paging events that are assigned the priority highest will over ride selection of Page Inhibit Thus emergency pages at this priority level cannot be prevented from reaching the SCP zone Power Indicator Below the Page Inhibit button is a Power indicator In normal operation this indicator will be lit constantly When this indicator is flashing it indicates that the unit is not connected to the RS485 network As the SCP is remote control device it will become inoperative if the Power indicator is flashing In this condition the MediaMatrix will retain the settings it had immediately prior to the network failure 9 4 Using PCUI Paging Station 9 4 1 Description The PCUI is a paging station that permits an operator to initiate paging events involving one of four page codes V4 0US September 2004 Page 149 MediaMatrix 22 ControlMatrix User s Guide Using Devices At the PCUI an operator can select a page code initiate an event and make spoken announcements via a microphone Each page code comprises two primary elements the first is the source of the page live page or recorded message and the second is the destination zone or group of zones to whi
94. Q Hosts A Hosts C Hosts and MediaMatrix frames all networked together The QNX based hosts Q Host and A Host are the subject of this section Q Hosts run the essential system server processes of a ControlMatrix system There is only ever one active Q Host in a system There maybe a second Q Host configured in a system but the second will act as a redundant spare for the first Each node has two standard Ethernet ports In a Q Host the first port is for the Control Network and the second is for the CobraNet network An A Host uses only the Control Network port The second port may be assigned to CobraNet network use but it may also be unused note that the CobraNet Network also accesses the one or two 560 cards installed in an A Host V4 0US September 2004 Page 207 MediaMatrix 22 ControlMatrix User s Guide Advanced Topics How are hosts identified A host number or node number identifies hosts The first Q Host a system 15 always node 1 Additional nodes occupy sequential numbers up to the number of nodes in the system Q Hosts are numbered first followed by A Hosts starting at the next available number For example a small system with a single Q Host and single A Host will have the Q Host at node number 1 and the A Host at node number 2 A very large system with two Q Hosts and four A Hosts will have the Primary Q Host as node 1 the Secondary Q Host as node 2 and the A Hosts will number as nodes 3 6 ControlMatr
95. Refit covers before installation 4 1 3 Install Network Equipment The MediaMatrix Q Host and the A Host if required must each connect to two separate networks CobraNet and ControlNet The CobraNet network carries audio and CA485 and audio network monitoring data while ControINet carries RATC control between the MediaMatrix and the Q Host as well as other control data The two networks must be physically separate but may be VLANs on an Ethernet switch or wide bandwidth backbone Network ports on the Q Host and A Host are labeled as either CobraNet or ControlNet On a MediaMatrix the standard network port the Single Board Computer connects to the ControlNet network while the CobraNet ports on each of the DPU cards connect to the CobraNet network For remote control to and from the ControlMatrix system the ControlNet network may be extended to computers and other equipment The CobraNet network also interconnects with CAB devices located centrally and or close to audio source and destination equipment network connections must be individually cabled to a separate port on the Ethernet switch es ControlNet and CobraNet networks must be either physically or virtually separated VLAN Network connections are summarized below See also Section 8 2 1 Device Network Q Host ControlNet Port ControlNet Labeled ControlNet Q Host CobraNet Port CobraNet Labeled CobraNet A Host ControlNet Port ControlNet If used Labeled ControlNet Q Hos
96. S A and or other countries 1 2 A Typical ControlMatrix System A ControlMatrix system is composed of central equipment and field equipment The central equipment comprises one or more processing devices termed hosts These are microprocessor based devices that deliver both the processing and messaging power behind ControlMatrix Field equipment provides system inputs and outputs plus user controls It includes paging stations and wall mounted controllers as well as MediaMatrix CAB units that interface other field devices to V4 0US September 2004 Page 9 ControlMatrix User s Guide Overview MediaMatrix 22 CobraNet Note that power amplifiers for paging speakers and the speakers themselves may also be termed field equipment although these are not typically supplied within the ControlMatrix framework ControlMatrix hosts communicate between each other the MediaMatrix and CABs using standard protocols for control and audio These protocols are transported using standard fast Ethernet hardware Field devices communicate using RS485 control data and analog audio m CABBi or 16i 71 XJ Background Source 1 CABBi or 16i puse
97. SCP address is required when configuring the system 4 1 5 Initial Power Up When all central and field equipment has been connected the system is ready for an initial power up Before commencing both the MediaMatrix and the Q Host should be fitted with a keyboard monitor and mouse standard Keyboard Video Mouse switch can also be used to reduce the need for excess peripherals During installation however it is recommended that a temporary arrangement of a monitor keyboard and mouse on both the MediaMatrix and Q Host be used Apply power to both MediaMatrix and Q Host and switch on the sequence is unimportant As each unit boots observe the respective monitors for any warning messages Assuming all has proceeded successfully the Media Matrix should start Windows 2000 and then start the Media Matrix software with a blank new View File The Q Host will show the typical BIOS information followed by the text of some script files It will eventually end in a dialog box labeled QNX Photon Login If either unit does not appear to start correctly consult the Peavey documentation for information about the MediaMatrix and the debugging section of this document Chapter 10 for assistance with the Q Host If all is well power be applied to the field equipment 4 1 6 Configure the MediaMatrix Minimize the MediaMatrix window so the desktop is visible Select Start Settings Control Panel Network and Dialup Connections Double click on
98. SVC2 zones are standard paging zones that have SVC2 wall mounted controllers for adjusting speaker volume and for selecting between one of four possible background sources SVC2 zones therefore provide four distinct outputs from the MediaMatrix An SVC2 controller is assigned to a paging zone here so that during paging the system may override the SVC2 volume setting in order that paging audio can be presented at the optimum level NOTE Only the first ten MediaMatrix zone numbers can be used as SVC2 zones To add a new SVC2 device to the system click the Edit device details button This will open the CA485 Device Manager New SVC2 devices will appear in the SVC2 assignment pane once the CA485 Device Manager has been closed To assign an SVC2 device to a paging zone select the paging zone from the list on the left side of the dialog and then select the SVC2 device from the list on the SVC Allocation pane Each paging zone may have more than one SVC2 assigned to it however each SVC2 can be assigned to only one zone Click the Assign to zone button to make the assignment 5 9 4 SCP Zones SCP zones are standard paging zones that have SCP wall mounted controllers for adjusting paging speaker volume and for selecting between one of four possible background sources or a local input SCP zones use only one output from the MediaMatrix SCPs are assigned to paging zones here Figure 5 18 so that the ControlMatrix system knows which MediaMatrix controls t
99. Section 6 2 1 While making a delayed announcement status indications in the Ptt button are as for a standard live announcement 1 Amber Please Wait Green Talk Now After the operator has finished making the announcement and the Ptt button is released the amber LED in the Ptt button will begin to flash and continue for five seconds If the operator presses the Ptt button within this five second period the delayed announcement will be discarded and the system will return to idle status If five seconds elapses without a Ptt button press the delayed announcement will be released for playback If the PCUI page code selection is for a recorded message playback rather than a live page the Ptt button is used to start the message Again the button is pressed and held The indicator in the button will illuminate amber when the button is pressed While the button is held there will be one of two outcomes a The amber indicator will change to green and begin to flash If this occurs the message replay request has been accepted The message will be placed in a queue and will be played as soon as all zones for which it is destined are available As soon as the green indicator flashes the operator can release the Ptt button and the indicator will extinguish OR b The amber indicator extinguishes If this occurs the message request has failed The operator should release the Ptt button and investigate the reason for failure If the unit is f
100. Sign Interface sends all data pertinent to a particular paging event out via a serial port using a defined protocol The data may then be used to render text on an alternative display system The Display Sign Manager provides controls for specifying the type of display and the port used for communication The same dialog box assigns an address and a descriptive label to the sign Type Generic kj Port ahost COM1 Ex Address 52 Label Food Court Generic Type Zone Assignment Generic ahost1 COMI 52 Food Court Generic Food court Alphavision Eclipse 9000 ghost1 COMI Main Concourse 9000 Main Concourse Alphavision Eclipse 9000 5 1 0 1 Info Desk E9000 Information Desk Alphavision Eclipse 3000 ghosti COMI Golden Wing Lounge E9000 Golden Wing Lounge Add Device Remove Devices Figure 5 10 Display Sign Manager V4 0US September 2004 Page 53 MediaMatrix 22 ControlMatrix User s Guide ControlMatrix Console To create a new display sign device click the Add Device button Choose the type of sign from the Type drop down list Next select the port that will be used to communicate with this particular sign from the Port drop down list The sign must then be given an address between I and 255 This address corresponds to that set on the DIP switches on the sign itself No two signs on the same port can have the same address To specify the address of the display sign type it into the text b
101. Thus it is not necessary to remove the microphone from the clip to start a recorded message 9 7 2 3 Selection Keypad A twelve button keypad telephone style is used to select the required page code In addition to the number keys there are next gt gt and previous lt lt keys that allow the selection of the next defined global page code to the one currently selected Page codes comprise three digits To select a page code key in the digits including leading zeros or use the next or previous keys As digits are entered on the keypad they appear in the top left of the LCD the combination of numbers changes the system searches to see if the numeric combination represents a valid selection 9 7 2 4 LCD Display A sixteen character two line rear illuminated display provides visual feedback to the operator of the selected page code page code description and paging status For clarity the display is divided into three regions as follows Display Region 1 Top Line first three character spaces Display Region 2 Bottom Line Display Region 3 Top Line remaining character spaces Display Region 1 Page Code As page codes are entered on the keypad they appear in Region 1 Display Region 2 Description When a page code is fully entered on the keypad the description of that page code as configured in ControlMatrix Console see Section 6 2 1 will appear in Region 2 V4 0US September 2004 Page 162 MediaMatrix
102. To change the label for a particular external output select it from the list of outputs and then type the new label into the Edit Label text box 511 System Time Setup V4 0US September 2004 Page 66 MediaMatrix lt p ControlMatrix User s Guide ControlMatrix Console The System Time Setup dialog can be used to set the time and date used by the Q Host This dialog can be opened using the System time item in the System Menu The dialog is divided into two panes Set the time and Time Zones The Set the time pane contains controls for selecting a time zone specifying the time in twelve hour AM PM format and finally for selecting the date If a particular time zone is not listed in the drop down list box provided a new one can be added to the system using the Time Zones pane Set the time Time Zones Select time zone Australia Y ancowinna Set the time 04 5 30 2 00 Set the date 2003 June Mo Tu We Th Fr Figure 5 22 Setting the time To specify the time zone for the current installation of ControlMatrix select the zone from the Select time zone drop down list box at the top of the Set the time pane To set the time type the hours and minutes into the text boxes provided or use the up and down arrows to make adjustments to the time already displayed Specify AM or PM using the mutually exclusive check boxes To set the date use the calendar control at the bottom of the Se
103. U must be connected to one of the PCU 210075 RS485 ports via a shielded twisted pair cable An appropriate cable is 22ga foil shield polyethylene insulation with a PVC jacket Belden 8761 or equivalent Do not use cable whose capacitance conductor to screen is greater than 50pF foot 165pF meter As the RS485 cable path usually matches the power supply path for wall mounted control devices a composite cable may be used This should consist of one screened pair for the RS485 and another heavier screened pair or unscreened triple for power See section 8 2 3 for more information Multiple CABs and associated PCU 2100s can be used within the network to serve RS485 data to field devices RS485 and power for individual field devices must be derived from the same PCU 2100 At the time of printing this manual RS485 connection pinouts differ on some ControlMatrix devices pinouts are in the process of being standardized When terminating RS485 connections the installer must check the Hi Lo markings adjacent to the device connectors and make connections accordingly It is also necessary to check this if equipment is exchanged for service Incorrect termination of RS485 will not damage the equipment but will prevent the device or other devices on the network from operating correctly RS485 networks should be connected according to the recommended model illustrated below Other models are possible but not recommended If using
104. aMatrix 22 ControlMatrix User s Guide ControlMatrix Console 5 1 Introduction The ControlMatrix Setup application tailors the ControlMatrix system for specific applications It is used to connect system field inputs to the MediaMatrix DAB digital audio bus and to associate ControlMatrix zones with MediaMatrix zone outputs The Setup application defines the wall mounted controller and paging station devices installed in the system as well as devices that are present on the ControINet network Lastly it allows the system administrator to down and restart the ControlMatrix system to incorporate recent changes to the configuration The ControlMatrix Setup application can run in one of two modes wizard mode and standard mode 5 1 1 To Start Setup ControlMatrix Setup is accessible either from the desktop of the Q Host graphical user interface or via the ControlMatrix Windows Client CMWC from a networked PC running Microsoft Windows To start Setup from the log at the graphical prompt using the Administrator user name and password Locate the Setup icon on the ControlMatrix toolbar and click once To start Setup from a PC running Microsoft Windows via the ControlMatrix Windows Client double click on the Setup icon and then enter the Administrator user name and password 5 1 2 Wizard Mode The wizard mode presents the configuration dialog boxes in a logical step by step sequence It also provides helpful prompts at each
105. abling such a feature places an increased load on the messaging system This may dictate an increase in the number of available record channels additional S560 cards may be required The announcement replay feature is enabled for pages at or above a specified priority The System Preferences dialog accessible from the System Menu in Setup is used to configure this facility Emergency replay Protect pages at priority level Medium Cancel Done To set the minimum priority for which automatic announcement replay will be invoked select the priority level from the drop down list box To disable announcement replay select the drop down list box item labeled Disabled V4 0US September 2004 Page 75 MediaMatrix 22 ControlMatrix User s Guide ControlMatrix Console 5 15 Help Menu The help menu is used to access specific help topics relevant to ControlMatrix Setup via the built in help viewer link is also provided which provides access to the system overview documents and links to all other help documents available on the Q Host The help documents are searchable and able to be book marked for future reference NOTE Help is not available when Setup 15 started using the ControlMatrix Windows Client A separate help icon is provided in this instance Also accessible from the Help Menu is an About box that displays the current release version of Setup as well as the licensee information V4 0US September 2004 Page
106. al node in a system Again it is necessary to individually login to each node and perform the following steps The QNX node number is actually hard coded into the kernel loaded at boot time the core part of the operating system Thus to change the node number is to change the kernel in the boot image Fortunately this is a largely optimized procedure The boot image is created from instructions stored in a script file This file is boot build install 1 Copy this file to a file called install n where n is the node number required by executing the command cp boot build install 1 boot build install n Edit the file using vedit by executing the command vedit boot build install n This will produce a display similar to the following boot sys boot boot sys boot v ur boot sys Proc32 boot sys Proc32 1 1 RU ome boot sys S1ib32 boot sys S1ib32 7 SA boot sys Slibl6 boot sys Slibl6 xr bin Fsys bin Fsys Xr V4 0US September 2004 Page 211 MediaMatrix 22 ControlMatrix User s Guide Advanced Topics bin Fsys eide bin Fsys eide fsys Ndsk0 0 0 5 0 eide 1 0 114 bin mount 5 bin mount p dev hd0 0 dev hd0 0t77 bin sinit bin sinit TERM qnxm Notice the line that is the call to Proc32 that takes a single argument boot sys Proc32 1 1 The 1 1 is the QNX node number In this case it indicates node 1 Change the 1 to the QNX node nu
107. all events to be written to the log A value of 0c00 will log all CA485 and inter process communications errors in single log Max length This is a decimal value that indicates the maximum length in bytes to which the log will be allowed to grow In ordinary use over a long period of time an unrestrained log will eventually consume all available disk space and cause problems with the system The maximum length listed here is the length at which point the log is truncated This value is relevant only for actual files A device file directed to a port e g dev par1 cannot be truncated It has no use for these values and should be set to zero Trunc length When the system chooses to truncate a log file length is the length at which the file is truncated It must be shorter than the max length 12 1 3 Other Details If the logfiles file does not exist the default log outputs listed above will be used To actually stop the standard file from being generated this file must exist and not contain the syslog log entry Be aware that removing this entry will cause problems for the ControlMatrix Console log viewer as there will be no log A maximum of ten log outputs can be generated by this mechanism 12 2 Creating New Pre Recorded Messages ControlMatrix has facilities for playing recorded messages either automatically via the system scheduler or under direct user control released from a PCU These messages ar
108. amble has finished and the audio path is open On seeing this display the operator should immediately make a live page into the microphone This display corresponds to a green indication on the LED in the Ptt switch Req Queued This display occurs when the Ptt button has been pressed the selected code represents a recorded message and the request to play the message has been accepted by the system A Req Queued display corresponds to the Ptt button indicator flashing green after a recorded message page code has been initiated see Section 9 5 2 2 V4 0US September 2004 Page 169 MediaMatrix lt p ControlMatrix User s Guide Using Devices Cancel This display relates to a page code configured for Delayed Release see Section 6 2 1 Page codes must be individually configured for this mode of operation For codes so configured the system will record live announcements and replay them as soon as the destination zones are available While making a delayed announcement status indications are as for a standard live announcement 1 e Amber Please Wait Green Talk Now After the operator has finished making the announcement and the Ptt button is released the amber LED in the button will begin to flash and continue for five seconds During this period Cancel will be displayed on the LCD If the operator presses the Ptt button within this five second period the delayed announcement will be discarded and the system will return
109. an additional NIC located in either the Q Host or A Host s Once the number of CobraNet networks that ControlMatrix needs to access via NICs has been determined add one to that number for the Control Network This is the total number of networks that QNX networking needs work with QNX networking uses logical network numbers The Control Network in a ControlMatrix system is always QNX logical network 1 The first CobraNet network is logical network 2 Additional CobraNet networks are numbered sequentially from 3 to 5 The Q Hosts in a system always use logical network numbers 1 and 2 V4 0US September 2004 Page 216 MediaMatrix 22 ControlMatrix User s Guide Advanced Topics As detailed above QNX will connect to the additional networks either via additional NICs installed in a Q Host or via the second Ethernet port on an A Host The procedure for setting up both is similar At the outset establish clearly which network 3 and above will be connected to which devices Once this is known configuration can proceed Changing the network configuration On the node that is to have the network edit the file that starts the network Execute the following command on that node sin ar grep Net This will produce a display similar to the following 49 System Net n20 69 System Net ether82557 I0 11 000 82 System Net ether82557 I0 12 400 The portion of the display in italics is the two command lines that start t
110. appropriate level for use with standard TPU units and telephone equipment The prompt files have particular names and are stored in a standard location on the Q Host the directory cm tpu prompts It is recommended that a recording studio and professional voice talent be engaged for the production of prompt files Standard Windows audio editing tools can be used to make the final adjustments to the recording 12 3 2 Basic Procedure Record the text as detailed in Table 12 2 for each of the required telephone prompts Ensure that the recording is noise free and undistorted Use a PC based editing program to normalize the audio level to 10dBFS and to add the silent leaders as indicated in the table These silent periods are required because some users will have a phone where it is not possible to hear from the earpiece and type DTMF codes simultaneously e g a cell phone The silent periods allow time to put the phone back to the ear after the completion DTMF code entry Save each of the completed files in 48kHz 16 bit PCM mono format using the correct file names as listed in the table Wave file name Text V4 0US September 2004 Page 204 MediaMatrix 22 ControlMatrix User s Guide Advanced Topics tpu prompt bad pin wav lt 3 second silent leader The access code you entered is not valid Please enter the code again followed by the pound or hash key tpu prompt cancel query wav lt 3 secon
111. ary IP Address text box or choose the appropriate address from the drop down list box Once the details of all the interlinked systems have been entered it is necessary to distribute NSI data amongst the participating systems Click the Synchronize button This will instigate an NSI data exchange between systems A synchronization step should be initiated on all system participating in NSI Page 51 MediaMatrix 22 ControlMatrix User s Guide ControlMatrix Console NOTE Do NOT carry out NSI synchronization until IP network connectivity has been established between all Q Hosts involved and until zone attribute configuration has been completed on each participating system 55 CA485 Device Manager The CA485 Device Manager Dialog Figure 5 9 is used to administer the creation or deletion of CA485 devices PCUs SCPs and SVCs Note that CA485 is the ControlMatrix protocol implemented using standard RS485 connections to devices the devices are assigned to a 485 port and are given a device address It is also possible to enter a device description that will be used to identify the device in other dialog boxes The Input Zone Assignment column is used to display at a glance the assignments made for the various device types For example PCUs must be assigned to a ControlMatrix system input so that the Q Host knows which audio path to route through the MediaMatrix whenever a page is made from that particular PCU Similarly SVCs are
112. assification mask The last two control the length of the logfile These fields will now be covered in more depth Filename This is the name of the file into which the log entries are written For standard files this is the name of the file in the filesystem It can include any accessible pathname and so could be SAMBA mounted drive a local file or any other node in the QNX network An advanced feature is that the filename field could contain the name of a device such as dev ser or dev parl In this case the data that would ordinarily be sent to the file is directed to the specified port for output to a printer or terminal device By using standard QNX device access data could be directed to a port on a remote node See the QNX help system for more details on how this can be configured V4 0US September 2004 Page 200 MediaMatrix 22 ControlMatrix User s Guide Advanced Topics Mask Each of the categories has a single bit value associated with it These values are listed in the table above If an event is logged in the system and a category bit associated with the event appears in the mask for a given log output then that event will be written to that log output For example a mask value of 0008 will see all paging activity and nothing else written to a log Similarly a log that contains all start up activity alone should have a mask value of 0002 A mask may contain more than a single value The default value of ffff allows
113. assigned to ControlMatrix paging zones so that the Q Host can send them to full volume whenever a page is made to their particular zone Type PCU Port 1 Address 33 Label Gate Lounge 13 Input Zone Assignment ghost1 33 Gate Lounge 13 Gate Lounge 13 PCU ghost1 CABNW1 PCU1 Gate Lounge 17 Gate Lounge 17 PCU ghost1 CABNWI PCU2 Main Concourse Main Concourse PCU ghost1 PCU3 Info Counter Information Counter PCU ghost1 PCU3 Gate Lounge 42 Gate Lounge 42 PCU ahost1 CABNW2 5 1 MC 11 Main Concourse ahost1 CABNW2 SVC1 Info Desk Information Desk ahost1 CABNW2 5 2 Terminal Terminal ecard CABNW3 SCP Western Bar Western Bar ecard CABNW3 SCP Banquet Hall Banquet Hall ghost1 CABNW1 PCU2 Check In Desk Check In Desk PCU Add Device Remove Devices Figure 5 9 CA485 Device Manager To create a new device click the Add Device button Choose the type of device from the Type drop down list Next select the port that will be used to communicate with this particular device from the Port drop down list This might be one of the CAB based ports CABNWI 2 4 or one of the physical serial ports COMI or COM2 provided by the Q Host CAB based ports CABNW2 CABNW3 and CABNWA are only provided to accommodate very large and complex systems CABNWI should be used by default V4 0US September 2004 Page 52 MediaMatrix 22 ControlMatrix User s Guide
114. ation Dialog The next step is to define all the remote systems that will participate in the system interlinking A label is assigned to each system and the IP address of the Q Host in each system 1s specified Once this process is complete on each of the systems participating in NSI the synchronization procedure described in section 5 4 Network System Interlinking Dialog is used to disseminate the required information to each of the hosts involved Once ControlMatrix servers are started on each of the interlinked systems the setup task is complete 12 7 2 Paging to remote systems using NSI Paging to a remote system participating in NSI is a simple as adding the appropriate remote paging zones to the destination list for PCU page codes or a scheduled announcement event for example Pages can have destinations in multiple remote systems Live pages destined for a remote system are first recorded using the store and forward mechanism The recorded announcement then is delivered via TCP IP to the destination system When the announcement has been received it is played out to the appropriate paging zones in the remote system Requests to play sequences of pre recorded announcements to zones in a remote system will proceed immediately if all the required WAV files are already available on the target system Any files that are not present on the remote system will be delivered over TCP IP before the sequence playback commences V4 0US September 20
115. ations that are busy SUBID Used to identify individual QNX processes that do similar tasks e g in a system with multiple MessageNet cards each would be controlled by a QNX process with a different sub ID that was the name of the card created in ControlMatrix Setup The sub ID identifies messages to a particular process in the system log Subnet Subdivision of a network typically TCP IP where computers are arranged into smaller working groups on the basis of a filter applied to the IP address carried in the header of the network data packets The filter is determined by the Subnet Mask see below and the computer will only recognize packets matching its own IP address within the scope set by that filter Subnet Mask A Subnet Mask is 4x 8bit binary numbers expressed in decimal form that define the bits to be tested when matching an incoming IP packet header with the IP address of the computer If the bit is a 1 the bit is tested if it is 0 it is ignored The computer only responds to packets that completely match the tested bits As a result of this the Subnet Mask also defines the maximum number of computers that can exist in a particular Subnet as each computer must have a unique IP address within the Subnet wall mounted controlling device used adjacent to speakers ControlMatrix zone to adjust sound level Selects taps on a local autotransformer Settings over ridden during a page to the zone
116. atrix Setup application Chapter 5 V4 0US September 2004 Page 148 MediaMatrix lt p ControlMatrix User s Guide Using Devices 9 3 2 Operation Level Control and Volume Display On the right side of the panel are two buttons without visual indicators These buttons adjust the volume of the speakers in 256 steps between off and full level If the up and down buttons are pressed briefly the SCP will step one level in the corresponding direction If a volume button is held for a period of approximately one half second the volume will begin changing automatically in 16 step intervals every half second until the maximum or minimum level is reached Associated with the volume controls is a group of eight indicators in a vertical row down the center of the panel These show the current position of the volume control The top indicator represents maximum level step 255 and the bottom indicator represents off step 0 The other indicators represent a range of values with approximately 32 volume steps per indicator step SCP Background Selection On the left side of the panel are five buttons with internal indicators The top four buttons select the background for the zone typically music The bottom button selects a Local Input within the zone if installed If there is no Local Input it is still possible to activate the button and as all five buttons are mutually exclusive this effectively provides a background off function SCP
117. atrix application within the same directory as Phindows typically the c lusrlphoton directory Create shortcuts on the desktop from this location 10 3 6 2 Error A serious file error occurred while reading the Preferences Solution The preferences file for ControlMatrix is corrupt Go to c winnt and delete the CMLaunch Prefs prf file If the error re occurs contact your local Peavey dealer 10 3 6 3 Error Username and or password fields have been left blank Solution ControlMatrix requires both a username AND password for entry into either ControlMatrix Setup or ControlMatrix Console Make sure that you have entered your username and password into the provided fields BEFORE attempting to login to the system 10 3 6 4 Error The new process could not be opened Error The new process timed out Error The process could not be started Error System resource allocation error Terminating Process Error The program did not reply as expected and has been terminated Solution An internal fault has prevented ControlMatrix from starting the session properly Contact your local Peavey dealer 10 3 6 5 Error ControlMatrix attempts to login but after a while does nothing and puts the message An error occurred Check the ControlMatrix Host setup into a dialog box Solution Your IP address for the Q Host may be wrong Try changing the IP address If the fault continues your Q Host may be set up incorrectly 10 3 7
118. atrix are set the Subnet masks are set and that there is a route between the two machines Try the Ping utility to check the route e Check that the MediaMatrix has the port enabled MediaMatrix Tools Options Remote Services f Using the standard Telnet utility from the MediaMatrix check that you can connect to the MediaMatrix RATC by Telnetting into port 1632 The standard login of Defaultuser with no password should get you a welcome prompt from the MediaMatrix You should also get an indication in the MediaMatrix terminal window that a connection has been made Check that the format of the file s is correct 48kHz 16bit PCM mono Files of incorrect format can be scheduled but will not play 10 3 3 I get no messaging a Make sure that at least one S560 MessageNet card has been installed in either the Q Host or an A Host Also confirm that the card has been installed in the card slot specified in ControlMatrix Setup card configuration b Check the MessageNet card configuration in ControlMatrix Setup Make sure the IP address assigned to the card is part of the CobraNet Subnet Confirm that the card host has been selected correctly Check that the card slot has been specified correctly Make sure both transmit and receive CobraNet bundles match those entered into the MediaMatrix View File for the system c Check that the ControlMatrix servers have been started in ControlMatrix Setup d Use the System Alarms
119. ay request has been accepted The message will be placed in a queue and will be played as soon as all zones for which it is destined are available As soon as the green indicator flashes the operator can release the Ptt switch and the indicator will extinguish OR b The amber indicator extinguishes If this occurs the message request has failed The operator should release the Ptt switch and investigate the reason for failure V4 0US September 2004 Page 159 MediaMatrix lt p ControlMatrix User s Guide Using Devices 9 6 2 3 Selection Buttons At the top left of the panel is a group of four Selection buttons Each button represents a page code selection To choose a page code press the button for that code An indicator in the top right corner of the button will illuminate to confirm the selection Page codes are assigned to particular buttons on each PCU3 in ControlMatrix Console see Section 6 2 1 Operation of the selection buttons is mutually exclusive only one can be selected at a time If an is associated with the PCU3 operation of the Ptt switch will cause the PCU3 selection button indicators to display the Selection being used by the This selection 15 configured at installation and cannot be altered by the PCU3 operator 9 6 2 4 Busy Indicator red indicator labeled Busy is located on the front panel It illuminates when the Ptt switch on an associated is operated When the lamp
120. below the keypad In the top right corner of the button is a Status indicator that may illuminate amber or green The primary action required to initiate a paging event from a PCU2 is pressing the Ptt button This action either sets up the system for a live page announcement into the microphone or releases a recorded message to the zones associated with the selected page code V4 0US September 2004 Page 153 MediaMatrix lt p ControlMatrix User s Guide Using Devices When making a live page the operator must press and hold the Ptt button for the duration of the event The indicator in the Ptt button will initially illuminate amber while the system establishes audio paths checks for zone availability and plays a preamble if selected An amber indicator may be interpreted as Please Wait this message will be displayed on the LCD The indicator will turn green once the system has made the microphone live when this occurs the user can begin speaking into the microphone Thus for a live page a green indicator may be interpreted as Talk Now this message will be displayed on the LCD Usually the indicator will extinguish when the button is released If the system is equipped with MessageNet and a zone is unavailable store and forward operation will be invoked In this instance the user should talk upon seeing a green indicator but the page will be recorded and replayed under control of the system MessageNet also make
121. between adjacent systems See also Networked System Interlinking Networked A ControlMatrix software module that facilitates Networked Systems System Interlinking Node A QNX term for Host Node Number A unique number between 1 and 65535 that QNX uses to identify a Node Outputs See MediaMatrix output Page See Live Page V4 0US September 2004 Page 231 ControlMatrix User s Guide Glossary MediaMatrix 22 Page Buttons Four Buttons on a PCUI PCU3 paging station that may be allocated to page codes Page Code paging code A code used to represent the definition of a paging event Page code attributes include live or recorded message attributes of recorded messages message priority live or delayed message preamble messages and associated sign text attributes Paging Station See PCU Paging Zone An indivisible entity that forms a destination for a live page or playback of recorded announcement A group of contiguously located paging speakers typically operating in a single acoustic space which it makes sense to operate as a group Pane A sub division of a graphical user interface dialog PCU Paging Control Unit the hardware interface used to make live pages or release recorded messages PCUI and PCU3 paging stations have four buttons that may be associated with page codes PCU2 PCU4 and PCUS paging stations have a k
122. busy zones become available In a system without store and forward a page made now from this PCU will be lost hence the user should delay making the page until the Delay message is gone N A This display indicates that the selected code is not accessible to this PCUS It will be accompanied by ether a Code Barred or Undefined Code display in Region 2 of the LCD Please Wait This display indicates that the Ptt button has been pressed and one or more of three conditions exists the preamble is currently playing e the zones are being set up e there is some delay in the system waiting for resources e g a wave player This display will usually correspond to an amber indication on the LED in the Ptt button and indicates that the operator should wait for the Talk Now display before making an announcement Req Failed This display indicates that the Ptt button has been pressed but the request has failed for some reason The cause may be that there is an error in the configuration file for that PCU the global code definition has an error or some required resource for the page is not available e g the MediaMatrix or a wave player device This display corresponds to the Ptt button amber indicator extinguishing after a recorded message page code has been initiated see Section 9 5 2 2 Talk Now This display indicates that the Ptt button has been pressed and the page has been correctly set up in the system any pre
123. cating the supply is operating normally and red indicating a fault Faults on the 12V Control Panel bus will automatically reset within a few seconds of the fault being removed Faults on the 15 V PCU supplies indicated by the 4 LEDs marked 15V will not automatically reset and require the power to the PCU 2100 to be removed for 5 seconds then restored Fault relay contacts appear on connectors at the rear of the PCU 2100 These may be used as inputs to an AHCI alarm card if fitted to alert the system supervisor to problems with the supplies Both the Alarm Card and fault relays are passive so there will need to be source of power included in the circuit either from one of the PCU 2100 outputs Control Panel Bus or a dedicated supply If more than one item is to be monitored with a single alarm input normally closed contacts must be connected in series so any failure will cause the loop to become open circuit See figure 8 4 for examples of connection methods Note The relay markings on the PCU 2100 rear panel refer to the normal powered state of the unit That is when the unit is powered and functioning correctly there is a connection between the and terminals When the supply is not powered or in a fault condition the and terminals are connected V4 0US September 2004 Page 141 MediaMatrix lt p ControlMatrix User s Guide Installation Reference Bank A Fault Alarm Card
124. ces of message playback Unified user interface with remote access using TCP IP Extensive input and output capabilities limited only by the dimensions of the MediaMatrix System alarms and logging Messages are prepared in standard file format Simple interface to other control systems plus all the DSP processing power and features of MediaMatrix ControlMatrix leverages the power and flexibility of MediaMatrix DSP technology by overlaying advanced and reliable control features Consultants integrators and operators now have access to paging and messaging control systems to match their advanced audio solutions ControlMatrix is e Based on open standards for audio and control transport TCP IP CobraNet fast Ethernet RS485 Scaleable and flexible The entire contents of this manual are Copyright 2004 Creative Audio a division of The CST Group Pty Limited Australia http www creativeaudio com au Creative Audio ControlNet and MessageNet are trademarks of The CST Group Pty Limited MediaMatrix and ControlMatrix are trademarks of Peavey Electronics Corporation CobraNet is a trademark of Cirrus Logic Incorporated Speechify is a trademark of Speechworks International Inc QNX and Photon microGUI are registered trademarks and Phindows is a trademark of QNX Software Systems Ltd Microsoft Windows Windows 98 Windows 2000 Windows XP are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the U
125. cescceuceeeteceecevtcenecevteceecesteesecerteenecert 123 7 1 2 TTS in ControlMalrix iiie op eee 123 7 2 Using ControlMatrix Courtesy eene nnns 124 lagli TUS UNG s Lo hier do disini nd ip 124 7 2 2 Configuring Courtesy Messages ssss 124 7 23 To Start ControlMatrix Courtesy eene need 124 7 2 4 Making a Courtesy 125 8 Installation Reference 9 1 127 8 1 1 Central Equipment IMStall ation 127 8 1 2 Field Equipment 127 8 2 System 127 8 2 1 Ethernet NebWOIKS 265 127 8 2 2 128 8 2 3 Power Distribution orietur roti etd Lar oio 129 8 2 4 Audio 0444 000 130 8 2 5 SVC1 Autotransformer Connection 131 8 3 Peripheral Device Setup 44 2224022 131 8 3 1 Setting up SVC1 SVC2 SCP and PCU 131 8 3 2 Setting up a TPU1 EF200 Telephone Pagin
126. ch the source will be directed When a valid page code has been selected pressing the Press to talk Ptt button will initiate a paging event Note that a page code may only have message sources if the system is fitted with the MessageNet option 9 4 2 Operation A PCUI is a desktop control unit with the following features Microphone Press to talk button and two color Status indicator Four Selection Buttons with indicator LEDs Power No Network Indicator These features combine to allow an operator complete control of paging functions 9 4 2 1 Microphone A sensitive noise rejecting goose neck microphone is provided on the PCUI front panel for spoken announcements Use the gooseneck to adjust the microphone to a workable position Speak clearly into the microphone at a distance of approximately 2 inches 50mm Speaking more closely may compromise speech intelligibility while speaking further away may reduce paging level and allow the intrusion of background noise If the PCUI 15 lifted off the desk during announcements grasp the case do not lift the PCU1 by the microphone gooseneck V4 0US September 2004 Page 150 MediaMatrix lt p ControlMatrix User s Guide Using Devices 9 4 2 2 Press to talk Ptt Button Status indicator The Press to talk button is located on the front panel below the selection buttons In the top right corner of the button is a Status indicator that may illuminate amber or green The primary action
127. ckground servers cm bin filemon amp cm bin alarmio amp cm bin cobber d dev ser2 amp V4 0US September 2004 Page 218 MediaMatrix 22 ControlMatrix User s Guide Advanced Topics start ControlMatrix servers cm servers The line of interest is the call to inteltrap see arrow marker at right Modify this line and replace it with the following etc config inteltrap Net ether82557 0 11 000 amp Net ether82557 0 12 pC400 This actually replaces the inteltrap call with two Net ether calls that have the same functionality These are the same calls noted earlier in this section An understanding of the required changes to the network is now necessary If a NIC is to be added to a Q Host then add the call as the next line after the two outlined above The exact form of that call will be determined by the type of NIC Check the QNX documentation help files to determine the call for your card One hint is to add the NIC to the machine and then execute the command nettrap query If the card is installed correctly this command will list the two lines above and a third line for the added NIC It 15 also necessary to know that the option is the logical network number Replace the appended digit with the logical net number associated with this NIC For a change to an A Host it is necessary to modify the second of the above Net ether82557 calls replacing the logical network number as required Up
128. clicked Click Done to close the text entry box and proceed with the user configuration Next type a description of the user into the User description text box Select the group to which the new user will belong Selecting the root group will give the new user administrative privileges Select the users group to give the new user standard user privileges Finally enter a password for the user into the Password text box and then confirm it by entering the password again in the Confirm password text box Click the Done button to save the user account information The user account is ready for use at this point To change the password for a particular user select the appropriate item in the user list on the left side of the User Manager dialog Then enter the new password for the user into the Password text box Confirm it by entering the password again in the Confirm password text box Click the Done button to save the user account information To remove a user account from the system select the user item to be removed and click the Remove button Click the Done button to save the changes to the user database Files Menu The Files Menu contains items that facilitate storage and retrieval of system configurations Using these items it is possible to restore the entire configuration of a ControlMatrix system from an archive on a CD or on the hard drive of the Q Host The current system configuration can be stored to an archive file on the file sys
129. copied into the devices folder most likely C Program Files MediaMatrix MWare Devices thus creating a folder C Program Files MediaMatrix MWare Devices ControlMatrix There should be at least five devices in this folder When the MWare software is restarted the devices will be available in the device menu 4 2 2 Building the View File Once the ControlMatrix devices are available a ControlMatrix View File can be created for use with MediaMatrix The remainder of this section assumes the reader is familiar with MediaMatrix In the ControlMatrix Device menu there are devices called nn zones is the maximum number of zones in a system Choose the smallest device that will accommodate the number of output paging zones required for the ControlMatrix system This device is the core of the ControlMatrix system Place it on a new View File It has a large number of input and output access points The inputs on the left side of the block are where input devices such as paging stations field inputs and background sources are connected The outputs on the right side of the block are the outputs to the paging zones Standard CobraNet I O blocks may then be placed corresponding to the DPU cards installed in the MediaMatrix frame Wire these I O blocks as appropriate to the nn zones device For a 50 Zone device on the input side the top input corresponds with DAB Channel 101 in the Input Configuration Dialog box Setup utility and the
130. ctive lines which are at the end of the file System log output files LOG WARN 0x0001 Equipment failure LOG START 0x0002 Normal process startup shutdown messages LOG EMERGENCYOx0004 Emergency alarm input activity LOG PAGE 0x0008 Paging activity progress LOG ERR 0 0010 Configuration file error LOG SWARE 0x0020 Internal Software error coding error LOG CHG 0 0040 Configuration Changes from guis LOG PAGE ERR 0x0080 Paging errors timeout no wave players etc LOG OP 0x0100 operator Activity eg scps assignable inputs LOG DEBUG 0x0200 Debugging messages LOG COMMS 0x0400 Interprocess comms error server not found LOG 485 0x0800 Comms error on 485 LOG SCHED 0x1000 Scheduled activity filename mask hex max length trunc length pagenet syslog log ffff 10000000 9000000 This file may be edited using vedit the standard text editor in QNX The procedure to access it is as follows Login to the console as Administrator Right click on the desktop and choose Shell from the menu Execute the command vedit cm config logfiles A full screen editor will now be displayed Use the arrow keys to navigate to the end of the file Edit the lines as required Use Alt X to exit choosing the Save option to save the file prior to exit Each active line in the file contains four entries The first is the name of the file The second is a hexadecimal representation of the cl
131. d 9 7 2 6 Power No Network Indicator At the top of the panel to the right of center is a Power Network indicator For the PCU4 to operate correctly this must be lit continuously If it is off the unit is not powered and if it is flashing it is not communicating with the Q Host or has not been correctly configured in the Q Host In this state the PCU will not respond to button presses Ensure that the indicator is lit continuously prior to using the PCU4 V4 0US September 2004 Page 165 MediaMatrix 22 ControlMatrix User s Guide Using Devices 9 8 Using a PCUS Paging Station 9 8 1 Description Similar to the PCU2 the PCUS is a paging station that permits an operator to initiate paging events involving one of 999 page codes The PCUS also includes 32 user programmable hot keys available for storing frequently used page codes At the PCUS an operator can select a page code initiate an event and make spoken announcements via a microphone Page codes on the PCUS can also be instantly recalled from any of the hot keys Each page code comprises two primary elements the first is the source of the page live page or recorded message and the second is the destination zone or group of zones to which the source will be directed When a valid page code has been selected pressing the Press to talk Ptt button will initiate a paging event Note that a page code may only have message sources if the system is fitted with the MessageNet
132. d at the bottom left corner of the Paging Station Configuration dialog box V4 0US September 2004 Page 87 ControlMatrix User s Guide ControlMatrix Console 6 2 2 Background Source Levels Dialog The Background Source Levels Dialog Figure 6 6 provides a means for varying the level of background sources defined for the ControlMatrix system A level fader is provided for each source This dialog will grow or shrink to accommodate the number of backgrounds defined for the system CD Player Radio 4KQ Radio MMM MP3 Jukebox Figure 6 6 Background Levels Dialog To adjust the level for a particular background source click and drag the associated fader Changes made to the fader positions are live and will result in immediate changes to system background levels Level adjustments made in this dialog globally affect the particular source wherever it is assigned in the system To adjust the background level for a particular zone see Section 6 3 Outputs Dialog The Done button closes the dialog V4 0US September 2004 Page 88 MediaMatrix 2 2 ControlMatrix User s Guide ControlMatrix Console 6 2 3 Background Allocation Dialog The Background Allocation dialog Figure 6 7 has two functions It is used to assign background sources to paging zones It also provides a means for specifying the four global backgrounds used by SCP and SVC2 wall mounted control panels Wallplates ee
133. d be connected to the ControlNet network l 2 Choose a or PCs with working installations of Windows98 Windows2000 or WindowsXP Repeat the instructions given in the first paragraph of Section 4 1 6 to ensure that TCP IP networking is correctly configured Insert the ControlMatrix installation CD in the PC Using Windows Explorer open or explore the CD and select the winclient folder From this folder double click install bat to run Don t install any shortcuts Phindows will be installed in the folder c usr photon Using Explorer locate that folder and find the file phindows exe Double click on it to run it A License Key will be requested This is a long string of case sensitive characters that can be found on the QNX License Certificate supplied with ControlMatrix Take care when entering the Key If the Key was entered correctly a dialogue box will open titled Connect asking for connection details Make sure the Use TCP IP box is checked but don t set IP addresses Click Apply and the application will fail with an error message This is normal From the c lusrlphoton folder make four shortcuts on the Windows Desktop One for c usr photon controlmatrix setup exe another for c usr photon controlmatrix console exe c usr photon controlmatrix help exe and finally c usr photon controlmatrix courtesy exe Double click on one of the icons and start the application Pull down the File menu and select Set IP address Enter the
134. d from the source folder to the destination folder The pathname of the folder displayed in each of the file list boxes is displayed in the pathname text box above each file list Each file list box has a home icon adjacent to pathname text box This can be used to return to the cm remote directory in the case of the source file list box or the cm waves directory in the case of the destination file list To copy files from the Remote Source Folder select each file by clicking on the file entry in the file list To select a range of files click on the first file in the range then while holding down the Shift key click on the last file Multiple files can be selected at random by holding down the Control key and clicking on the file list entries Once all the files have been selected click the Copy key The copied files will appear in the Local Destination folder if successful To create a new destination folder click on the New button below the Local Destination Folder file list Enter the name for the new folder into the text box when prompted to do so and then click the Done button To delete files or folders from the destination folder first select them using the techniques described for copying files Once all the files and folders for removal have been selected click the Delete button V4 0US September 2004 Page 107 MediaMatrix 22 ControlMatrix User s Guide ControlMatrix Console WAV Manager Text Association Preamble Selectio
135. d messages and the other for the background The Outputs Menu is accessible using the hotkey or the mouse Figure 6 11 Outputs Dialog To adjust the paging audio level for a zone first select the zone from the Paging Zone drop down list Then click and drag the fader labeled Paging to adjust the level Changes to level will occur immediately To adjust the background level for a zone first select the zone from the Paging Zone drop down list Then click and drag the fader labeled Backgnd to adjust the level Changes to level will occur immediately The Done button simply closes the dialog V4 0US September 2004 Page 94 MediaMatrix 22 ControlMatrix User s Guide ControlMatrix Console 6 4 Scheduling Menu The paging system incorporates an event scheduler The Scheduling Menu provides access to controls for configuring the event scheduler and previewing a daily schedule Events can be scheduled to occur on a one shot basis or to repeat according to a specified set of criteria time day date etc All events are triggered on minute boundaries There are three different types of events e Playback of recorded messages WAV files via the message playback device to selected paging zones e Assignment of a background source to paging zones e Assignment of a user input to a list of destination paging zones The Scheduling Menu is accessible using the Alt S hotkey or the mouse 6 4 1 Schedule Configuration Dialog
136. d silent leader Your page has been recorded cancel your message press any key otherwise wait and your page will be made tpu prompt code wav lt 3 second silent leader gt Please enter the required three digit paging code followed by the pound or hash key tpu_prompt_code_error wav lt 3 second silent leader gt The code you entered is not valid Please enter another three digit paging code followed by the pound or hash key tpu prompt page cancelled wav lt 3 second silent leader Your page has been cancelled tpu prompt page submitted wav lt 3 second silent leader gt Your page has been submitted tpu_prompt_seq_play wav lt 3 second silent leader gt The recorded sequence you selected has been queued for playback tpu_prompt_speak_now wav lt 3 second silent leader gt At the conclusion of this message make your paging message and finish by pressing any key on your phone Page now tpu_prompt_welcome wav Welcome to the telephone access of the ControlMatrix Paging system Please enter your telephone access code followed by the pound or hash key Table 12 2 Telephone paging unit voice prompts After the files have been created they must be transferred to the Q Host cm tpu prompts directory before they can be used by ControlMatrix There are two ways to effect this transfer Firstly if the PC containing the files is networked with the Q Host Windows networking can be used to copy the files directly Using
137. date the netmap file As a last task it is necessary to return to the etc config netmap file and modify it for all nodes Change the logical network numbers for those Ethernet ports that have changed and add entries for those NICs that have been added The resultant netmap file may appear as follows Logical Lan Physical TX Count Last TX Fail Time 1 00 0 9 684A7C 2 00DOC9 684A7D 3 0091f8 112134 1 00DOC9 684A7E 4 00DOC9 684A7F This is netmap file that has been modified for an additional NIC connected to logical network 3 in node 1 the Q Host and the second Ethernet port in node 2 an A Host has been moved to logical network 4 Copy the netmap file to all nodes using the command cp 1 etc config netmap n etc config netmap and then reboot all of the nodes V4 0US September 2004 Page 219 MediaMatrix 22 ControlMatrix User s Guide Advanced Topics All of the nodes should now be able to see each other on logical network 1 and should each be able to see the other networks as configured Finally login to Q Host 1 and run ControlMatrix Setup In the Network dialog configure all of the above information On the next reboot all of the system should now be functional V4 0US September 2004 Page 220 MediaMatrix 22 ControlMatrix User s Guide Advanced Topics 12 5 Determining the number of 5500 Cards required in a system ControlMatrix systems may be fitted with one or mo
138. ddresses are in the range of 0 31 The user s manual has more information on the setting of these switches Audio Phone Cabling The phone line should be attached to the port labeled Line on the rear panel Do not connect anything to the To Phone port The EF200 requires an audio input and output from the ControlMatrix system for voice prompts and paging The audio connectors used on the TPU1 EF200 3 5mm pluggable screw types and are labeled To From AEC on the rear panel The user s manual contains information on the pinouts appropriate cable is 22ga foil shield polyethylene insulation PVC jacket Belden 8761 or equivalent Communications If the EF200 is the first unit in a chain connect a standard DCE gt DTE 9 pin serial cable from the relevant COM port of the Q Host into the port labeled Remote Control on the rear panel of the TPU1 EF200 Cable length should be less than 100 feet 30 meters Other 1 EF200 units can then be added by chaining the ASPI buses on the units the user s manual has more information on this technique Only use the ASPI bus to chain units together do not parallel the serial connections Power The power for the TPU1 EF200 is supplied using an external power supply This supply is a multi voltage regulator that is supplied with the EF200 It connects to a DINS port marked Power on the rear of the TPU1 200 8 3
139. de ControlMatrix Console 6 2 Inputs Menu The Inputs Menu provides access to controls for setting up user inputs changing the configuration of paging stations varying the background source levels and assigning backgrounds to paging zones The Inputs Menu is accessible using the Alt I hotkey or the mouse 6 2 1 Paging Station Configuration Dialog This dialog is used to configure and allocate page codes associated with paging stations A page code comprises a combination of unique attributes that together constitute a paging event In order that a user may invoke a paging event page codes are allocated to buttons on four button paging station or to a list of Global Codes that can be assigned for use on any keypad paging station Page code attributes and options are e Live or recorded message choose one or other Delayed Release for Live Messages choose on or off Priority choose one of several priority levels Destination paging zones choose from available zones Preamble message choose on or off Message choose what recorded message to play Text Signs choose on or off and attributes of sign display Note that MessageNet software and hardware must be installed for items marked These features will be disabled if MessageNet components are not present Sign hardware and software must be installed for item marked The Paging Station Configuration dialog Figure 6 1 allows the user to set up the attributes of a page c
140. describes the fault and follow the links to questions and suggestions that may help to locate the cause of the problem 10 1 1 Monitoring System Inputs and Outputs When creating the MediaMatrix View File for a ControlMatrix installation it is recommended that a signal probe device be included and compiled in The signal probe can then be used to route the audio from any point in the signal path through the MediaMatrix to a monitoring output This output should be connected to a monitor amplifier and associated speaker Reference will be made to this mechanism for monitoring field inputs paging zone outputs etc The MediaMatrix User Guide explains the use of the signal probe in more detail 10 1 2 Using the Ping Utility The Ping utility is useful for confirming network connectivity between two devices on a network using the IP Internet Protocol Ping periodically sends a request to a remote device eliciting a response to the sending device Reception of the response is indicative of a valid network connection between the device running Ping and the remote device Ping is available as a command line utility from the Microsoft Windows command prompt and the QNX Pterm terminal The Windows command prompt can be reached from the Start Run menu by typing command To reach the QNX Pterm prompt login as administrator see Section 4 1 8 and select the computer icon from the QNX desktop For more information about Pterm select the question mark help
141. destination for a background page or message Device Address See CA485 Address Device CA485 See CA485 Device Diagnostics Menu A ControlMatrix Console menu that assists with system troubleshooting Dialog A user interface panel containing operable features and text feedback Don t Clear A button that prevents a User Input assignment from being cleared automatically after a given time Done Pressing this button in any dialog makes the changes that have been made take effect and closes the dialog Duck Reduce the level of a background to permit another program source to be heard Event A program item that can be controlled by the scheduler Event Label A descriptive name given to an event Event Type Events may be of type Message scheduled release of recorded message s Background scheduled changes to background and User Input scheduled assignment of User Inputs Filter filtering In the Schedule preview dialog a means of categorizing events to be previewed by their attributes Global Alarms In the System Alarm dialog is a tab that causes all the active system alarms to be displayed in the alarm panel V4 0US September 2004 Page 230 ControlMatrix User s Guide Glossary MediaMatrix 22 Global Page A central list of Page Codes each of which has been allocated a unique a three Codes digit number From this list codes are allocated made Active Code
142. device is offline At times I see the indicators status and or busy coming on and off or changing color without me touching the panel c Someone is using the other panel i e you are watching the PCU4 while the is being used and what you are seeing 15 normal operation d The microphone or cable is damaged and sensitive to movement and is occasionally triggering selections by itself Try shaking the microphone cable and see if the problem appears If it is the local microphone the busy indicator won t come on but will on the remote if present and visa versa If the cables or microphone are sensitive to movement the PCUA is faulty and needs to be serviced I have a zone selected and press the microphone switch but the status indicator doesn t light either occasionally or every time d Faulty microphone switch or cable on the microphone The PCUA needs to be serviced e The PCUA circuitry is faulty and needs to be serviced f If the device you are at is a RMPI it is possible that the paging code the PCU4 is programmed to use for the page is not configured ControlMatrix Console Paging codes are programmed in isolation from the Q Host so any code number can be programmed irrespective of whether is valid 10 3 10 I have a problem with RS485 over CABs 10 3 10 1 based port does not work a Make sure you have started the ControlMatrix servers in ControlMatrix Setup b Using the ControlMatrix Cons
143. dicator flashes the operator can release the Ptt switch and the indicator will extinguish OR b The amber indicator extinguishes If this occurs the message request has failed The operator should release the Ptt switch and investigate the reason for failure 9 9 2 3 Busy Indicator red indicator labeled Busy is located on the front panel It illuminates when the Ptt switch on an associated PCU3 or PCU4 is operated When the lamp is illuminated all paging activity from an associated PCU will preclude operation of the RMP1 Note that a similar lamp illuminates on the PCU when the RMPI Ptt switch is operated V4 0US September 2004 Page 172 MediaMatrix lt p ControlMatrix User s Guide Using Devices V4 0US September 2004 Page 173 MediaMatrix 22 ControlMatrix User s Guide Using Devices 9 10 Using a Telephone Paging Unit 9 10 1 Description There are three Telephone Paging Unit models available for use with ControlMatrix From the operator s point of view they are identical The TPU provides an interface through which paging events can be issued from a telephone TPUs respond to the same set of 999 page codes used by PCU2s PCUAs The TPU allows an operator to select a page code and deliver a spoken announcements via the microphone in the telephone handset Alternatively playback of a sequence of pre recorded announcements can be initiated Each page code comprises two primary elements the first is the s
144. djacent paging speakers when a page is made from the associated PCU To associate an SYC with a particular PCU select the adjacent SVC from the drop down list New SVC devices can be added to the system using the CA485 Device Manager accessible by clicking the Edit PCU Devices button S 8 2 Background Inputs Background inputs are used to deliver audio from background sources such as CD players and radio receivers Background inputs require no further configuration 5 8 3 User Inputs User inputs take audio from miscellaneous audio sources in the field and allow them to be semi permanently assigned to one or more paging zones User inputs require no further configuration V4 0US September 2004 Page 58 MediaMatrix 22 ControlMatrix User s Guide ControlMatrix Console 5 8 4 SCP Local Inputs SCP Local type inputs are those system inputs that can be selected using the Local button on a wall mounted SCP control panel Once an input has been designated to be an SCP Local type the Input Device Details pane for SCPs becomes visible This pane is used to connect an SCP device to a system input The pane contains a drop down list that contains all available SCP devices Figure 5 15 Select input type Edit input label ipit Device SCPLocal KJ Western Bar Input Select SCP wallplate device Input Label Type i SCP Western Bar CD Player Background Radio 4KG Background Radio Background MP3 Jukebox Background Main Co
145. e Figure 6 12 Schedule Configuration Dialog V4 0US September 2004 Page 95 MediaMatrix lt p ControlMatrix User s Guide ControlMatrix Console Creating an Event To create a new event click on the New button under the event list pane This will reveal the event type selection dialog box From this dialog box select the type of event to be scheduled by clicking the corresponding event type button Once the selection has been made click the Done button Select the type of event to create Recorded Message w Background User Input Figure 6 13 Selecting a New Event Type The configuration pane will now contain the default settings for the chosen event type These settings can be modified as desired See the following sections for a detailed description of the parameters for particular event types To abort the event creation process click the Cancel button on the Event Type Selection dialog box Deleting an Event To delete an existing event from the schedule first select the event item in the event list pane Click on the Delete button under the event list It is necessary to confirm the request for event deletion by clicking the Proceed button when the warning dialog box becomes visible To abort the deletion process click the Cancel button Creating a Duplicate Event A copy of an existing event can be made by selecting the event to be copied from the event list Once the selectio
146. e I can t start ControlMatrix Console from the desktop icon a remote PC The background source level faders don t work or I get a GET BACKGROUND LEVEL error The Background allocation doesn t work I can t make a user input assignment 10 3 7 3 The zone level faders don t work or I get the GET PAGE 10 3 7 4 LEVEL error 10 3 7 5 One of my scheduled events doesn t work 10 3 7 6 None of the scheduled events are working 10 3 7 7 I can t find any controls for playing recorded announcements 10 3 7 8 I can t find the control for playing a preamble before an announcement 10 3 7 9 I have an active alarm 10 3 7 10 I have a problem with a wall mounted controller The controller has its power network indicator flashing The controller is offline The controller is online but it is not responding to button presses I have a problem with an SVC1 I have a problem with an SVC2 I have a problem with an SCP V4 0US September 2004 Page 178 MediaMatrix 22 ControlMatrix User s Guide Debugging I have a problem with a PCU The network LED is flashing PCU is offline I press the press to talk button nothing happens I press the press to talk button it changes color to amber and nothing more I press the press to talk button the LED 1n the button goes green but when I speak it cannot be heard in the destination zone I selected I don t get preamble bells when I press the Press to talk before making an announcement e havea problem with a PCUI
147. e SCP Allocation pane Each paging zone may have more than one SCP assigned to it however each SCP can be assigned to only one zone Click the Assign to zone button to make the assignment 5 10 Alarm Manager The Alarm Manager Figure 5 19 accessible using the Alarms menu button is used to enable and label the twelve MediaMatrix alarms made available on the ControlMatrix view file These are general purpose alarms that can be control grouped in the MediaMatrix to facilitate display of remote alarm states in ControlMatrix The Alarm Manager also defines the role of each external input and output port provided by a ControlMatrix AHC1 Hardware I O card External outputs can be one of the following types Summary Alarm New Alarm and Host Failure The Summary Alarm output will be active whenever there is an active alarm in the system The New Alarm output will be active whenever a new alarm is detected and until an Alarm acknowledgement signal is received acknowledgement can be generated using the Acknowledge button on Console s System Alarms Dialog or from an external input The Host Failure output is used in systems with redundant Q Hosts and will go active when a Q Host detects a failure in its redundant companion Q Host V4 0US September 2004 Page 63 MediaMatrix 22 ControlMatrix User s Guide ControlMatrix Console External inputs can be categorized into two types General Alarm and Alarm Acknowledge General Alarm inputs take the
148. e Zone Attribute Configuration Dialog To assign a display sign to a zone of any type first select the zone from the list on the left side of the dialog Then select the display signs to be assigned to that particular zone from the list on the Sign Allocation pane To select a range of signs select the first item in the range and then while holding down the Shift key select the last item in the range To select multiple signs at random hold down the Ctrl key while selecting the items to be assigned one by one Once the selection has been made click the Assign to zone button to make the assignment To add display signs to the system or change part of their configuration click the Edit sign details button to proceed to the Display Sign Manager 5 9 1 Standard Zones Standard zones can be used as the destination for live pages recorded announcements and backgrounds Background selection and level for standard zones can only be controlled from ControlMatrix Console 5 9 2 SVCI Zones SVCI zones are standard paging zones that have SVC wall mounted controllers available for adjusting speaker volume An 5 is assigned to a paging zone so that during paging the system may override the SVC volume setting in order that paging audio can be presented at the optimum level Once a zone has been designated as an SVC zone the SVC device assignment pane becomes visible This pane Figure 5 17 is used to assign SVCs to a particular paging zone The pane
149. e assigned to and played in zones continuously but may be over ridden by paging audio or messages Browse mode Allows uninterrupted browsing of the system log by preventing new log entries log viewer from forcing the viewing area to scroll to reveal the new entry Bundle In CobraNet the basic network transmission unit Up to eight audio channels may be carried in a bundle See also http www peakaudio com CobraNet Terminology html Bundle Allocation A number between 1 and 65279 given to a Bundle to distinguish it for use by particular CobraNet devices Button Number The number of a button on a PCUI PCU3 or an SCP in each case button is at the top or left 4 at the bottom or right CA485 A proprietary communications protocol applied over an RS485 network used by PCU paging stations and wall mounted controllers CA485 Address The address of a CA485 device set using the DIP switches provided on the device Address 0 is invalid 1 is the master 2 to 255 are available for use CA485 Device A device that resides on a CA485 network A PCU paging station or wall mounted controller CA485 Port A physical interface used by the Q Host to communicate with CA485 devices CAB A Peavey CobraNet Audio Bridge providing an audio interface in or out and RS485 control interface to CobraNet CAB Address See CAB ID CAB Address is the label on the CAB switches CAB based port An RS485 port w
150. e code button has been configured 10 3 9 4 I press the press to talk button the LED in the button goes green but when I speak it cannot be heard in the destination zone I selected a Use ControlMatrix Setup to ascertain that the MediaMatrix audio input associated with the PCU has been correctly assigned to the PCU CA485 device b Monitor the PCU input using the signal probe to ensure that PCU audio is arriving at the MediaMatrix Trace the audio from the input to the destination paging zone output c Check the audio cabling to the paging amplifier for the zone in question and make sure there is signal present at the amplifier input 10 3 9 5 I don t get preamble bells when I press the Press to talk before making an announcement a Check the configuration of the PCU using the Paging Station Configuration dialog in ControlMatrix Console Make sure the P ay preamble button 1s checked b Ensure MessageNet has been installed correctly and that the wave player channels are active Use the Alarms panel in ControlMatrix Console V4 0US September 2004 Page 187 MediaMatrix 22 ControlMatrix User s Guide Debugging 10 3 9 6 I have a problem with a PCUI I can t select a page code The buttons don t work a Make sure the PCUI 15 on line the network LED 1s on solid If not see the Section 10 3 7 10 A 485 device is offline b Check that the PCUI has been added to the list of devices in the Device Manager dialog box in ControlMatrix
151. e for up to 20 watt speaker circuits while the SVC1 may be used with an external autotransformer for higher power applications The panel of SVCI includes Up and Down level buttons as well as a LED bar graph to indicate the current volume setting RS485 networking permits the 5 to be remotely sent to maximum level for paging or muted for a live page originating in the SVC1 zone V4 0US September 2004 Page 24 MediaMatrix lt p ControlMatrix User s Guide ControlMatrix Elements SVC2 Selector and Volume Control The SVC2 paging speaker source selector and volume control may be used for local source selection and volume control of constant voltage 70 or 100 volt line loudspeakers Source buttons are used to select one of four constant voltage inputs Volume is adjusted by using increment and decrement keys to select taps on an internal autotransformer inserted in the feed line to the loudspeaker LEDs within the four source select buttons indicate the selected input and an LED bar indicates the current volume setting RS485 networking permits the SVC2 to be remotely sent to maximum level for paging or muted for a live page originating in the SVC2 zone 3 3 4 PCU 2100 Load Sharing Redundant Power Supply The PCU 2100 Load Sharing Redundant Power Supply is a 2U rack mounted power supply system for Control Matrix field paging components It has two independent power supply modules or banks each capable of simultaneously p
152. e is using the other panel i e you are watching the PCU3 while the is being used and what you are seeing 15 normal operation b The microphone or cable is damaged and sensitive to movement and is occasionally triggering selections by itself Try shaking the microphone cable and see if the problem appears If it is the local microphone the busy indicator won t come on but will on the if present if it is the microphone the PCU3 busy indicator will also go on and off If the cables or microphone are sensitive to movement the PCU3 is faulty and needs to be serviced I have a button selected and press the microphone switch but the status indicator doesn t light either occasionally or every time a Faulty microphone switch or cable on the microphone The PCU3 needs to be serviced b The PCU3 circuitry is faulty and needs to be serviced c If the device you are at is a RMPI it is possible that the page code that the PCU3 is programmed to use for the is not configured in ControlMatrix Console Note that unless a page code is assigned to a button for the particular PCU3 in ControlMatrix selecting the button will not result in a successful paging event While it is possible to program a PCU3 so that the identifies with a particular PCU3 button that button must also have a page code assigned before the selection can be used I press the microphone switch and the status indicator goes green I hear the
153. e on the right to set up the attributes of the page code see V4 0US September 2004 Page 81 MediaMatrix 22 ControlMatrix User s Guide ControlMatrix Console below Finally click the Apply button A new sub branch will be added to the tree under the Global Codes branch To edit an existing global page code select the required sub branch under the Global Codes branch Alternatively use the Page Code selection controls in the right pane Then use the right pane to edit the attributes of the page code Paging Stations Available Codes Active Codes Four Button Paging Stations Terminal page Gate lounges PCU1 Gate Lounge 13 Golden Wing Baggage Message f Terminal page PCU1 Gate Lounge 17 PCUS Info Counter Gate Lounge 42 Keypad Paging Stations 6 Global Codes Gate lounges Terminal page Baggage Message Golden Wing PCU2 Main Concourse PCU2 Check In Desk i at 0 TPU at 1 Clear page code Page Timeout 120 secs Figure 6 2 Allocating Global Codes to a PCU2 To allocate a global page code to a particular keypad paging station select the desired PCU2 PCUA or PCUS sub branch from the Keypad Paging Stations tree to reveal the Active Codes list in the right pane Select codes from the Available Codes list and click the Add button to add them to the Active Codes list By default new global codes are allocated to all PCU2 PCU4
154. e stored in standard WAV file format This section describes the steps required to create message files suitable for use with ControlMatrix V4 0US September 2004 Page 201 MediaMatrix lt p ControlMatrix User s Guide Advanced Topics 12 2 1 Background For use with ControlMatrix recordings must be made as standard windows format wave files WAV extension recorded in 48kHz 16bit linear PCM samples mono format For uncompressed speech audio samples should be normalized to peak at 10dBFS as this level delivers appropriate relativity to other audio levels in the ControlMatrix system It is recommended that a recording studio and professional voice talent be engaged to produce these files Standard windows audio editing tools such as CoolEdit 2000 www syntrillium com may be used to make the final adjustments to the recording 12 2 2Audio and Acoustic Considerations Use a recording environment commensurate with the venue in which the messages will be replayed For example a conference facility or performance venue may require significantly higher recorded quality than a railway station Intelligibility will be higher if the recording environment has a very short reverberation time and extraneous noise 15 kept to a minimum As detailed above the recommended level for speech recordings is 10dBFS This level is appropriate for uncompressed speech If it is desirable to compress the audio signal the level should be set after
155. e system SNMP management and monitoring Management of Field Devices 3 2 2 Messaging and MessageNet Fundamental features of the ControlMatrix system are message replay and paging store and forward These features are made possible by S560 CobraNet Messaging Cards under control of MessageNet software One or more of these cards maximum four may be installed in a system depending on message requirements see Chapter 12 Section 12 4 for more information on how to determine the number of cards required in a system When recording S560 cards extract digital audio data from selected CobraNet packets and store it on the controller hard drive as WAV files During replay digital audio from requested recorded WAV files is assembled onto appropriate CobraNet channels Within the Host data passes from the hard disk drive to the 5560 card via a standard PCI bus Thus an 560 card constitutes a CobraNet to PCI bridge S560 cards make possible several facilities Playback of WAV files from any source Playback of messages created by a text to speech interface Playback of assembled message sequences Recording of live messages via CobraNet Simultaneous live message recording and playback V4 0US September 2004 Page 21 MediaMatrix 22 ControlMatrix User s Guide ControlMatrix Elements The latter case makes possible storage of messages that are destined for a busy zone s for later replay Each S560 card permits simultaneous replay of eig
156. e system remains unresponsive a b Make sure ControlNet software has been installed the host in using the Administrator username and password The ControlMatrix Setup and Console icons should be visible on the desktop tool bar Use ControlMatrix Setup to confirm the configuration of the system Use ControlMatrix Setup to start the ControlNet servers using the System Menu item Start Servers V4 0US September 2004 Page 180 MediaMatrix lt p ControlMatrix User s Guide Debugging d Check the System Alarms panel in ControlMatrix Console under the Diagnostics Menu Rectify any faults indicated here See Section 10 3 7 10 I have an active alarm 10 3 2 Ihave a problem with the MediaMatrix 10 3 2 1 not connect to the MediaMatrix a Check power to the MediaMatrix Make sure it is running and that the ControlMatrix View File is loaded and compiled b Check that all of the network ports are connected via 5 cables to an appropriate network switch c Check that the ControINet and CobraNet network connections are either made to separate networks or that independent VLANs have been setup on the network switch If CobraNet data is allowed onto the ControINet network e g if the VLANs have not been setup a busy CobraNet network will swamp the ControlNet network especially if any of the ControlNet network links are only 10Mbps d Make sure that the IP addresses of the Q Host and the MediaM
157. e to duck the background when audio is detected on the specified input To mute the background check the Mute Backgrnd button To duck the background when signal presence is detected check the Duck on Signal button These buttons are mutually exclusive To choose the destination paging zones for the input assignment select the zone names in the Available Zones list then click the Add button The zones will be added to Destination Zones list Zones can be removed from the Destination Zones list by first selecting them then clicking the Remove button To select a range of zones select the first zone in the range then while holding down the Shift key select the last zone in the V4 0US September 2004 Page 92 MediaMatrix 22 ControlMatrix User s Guide ControlMatrix Console range To select multiple zones at random hold down the Ctrl key while making selections To activate the input assignment for the first time or to change parameters associated with a current assignment click the Apply button To clear an active input assignment select the assignment entry in the Active Inputs list then click the Clear button V4 0US September 2004 Page 93 MediaMatrix 22 ControlMatrix User s Guide ControlMatrix Console 6 3 Outputs Dialog The Outputs Dialog Figure 6 11 is used to set the relative levels of paging audio and background audio for a particular paging zone Two level faders are provided one for paging both live and recorde
158. e unit to be set If the switch settings are changed the unit must be reset before the change will take affect by briefly removing power from the unit Setting all switches off 0 creates an invalid address If power is applied to the unit while this address is set it will cause the fault indicator to flash and the unit will not operate properly until the address correctly set In this condition the switches may be changed without the need for any further reset and a non zero address that has remained constant for five consecutive flash sequences will become the new unit address Login Status display The login status of a unit is displayed with its Power No Network LED If the LED is on constantly the unit is logged in on line and should be functional assuming it is configured correctly in the Q Host Ifthe power LED is flashing the device cannot find a network and it is not logged in This may be because of a connection or configuration problem An SVC device that is off line will still allow adjustment of the level and program source for an SVC2 of its associated speaker however changes made will not be stored by the Q Host and it cannot automatically go to full level or mute during a page Changes made while the unit is off line will be returned to the last state saved in the Q Host once the RS485 network is restored SCP devices that are off line will not function V4 0US September 2004 Page 132 MediaMatrix 22 ControlMatrix
159. ed background source from the drop down list Click the Apply button to activate the changes Clicking the Done button will have the same effect and will also close the dialog To discard any changes that have not yet been applied click the Cancel button This will also close the dialog V4 0US September 2004 Page 90 MediaMatrix 59 ControlMatrix User s Guide ControlMatrix Console 6 2 4 User Inputs Dialog The User Inputs dialog Figure 6 9 is used to set up temporary or permanent audio connections from a specified system input source to a list of destination paging zones The left side of the dialog box lists all currently active input assignments The time at which the assignment will be cleared is indicated in the adjacent column The right side of the dialog box is used to alter input assignment parameters for new or existing assignments TERATE Room 23 South corner E Main Concourse Golden Wing Lounge Terminal Food Court Terminal B Gate Lounge 14 Gate Lounge 15 Gate Lounge 16 Gate Lounge 17 Gate Lounge 18 Gate Lounge 19 Gate Lounge 20 Gate Lounge 21 Figure 6 9 User Inputs Dialog To create a new input assignment click the New button under the Active Inputs list Next select the desired input source from the Available Inputs drop down list on the right side of the dialog box V4 0US September 2004 Page 91 MediaMatrix 22 ControlMatrix User s Guide ControlMatrix Console Active Inputs
160. ed in good condition If there are any discrepancies in quantities if you are having trouble identifying items or if the equipment has been damaged in transit please contact your dealer immediately In addition to the ControlMatrix equipment supplied a system requires one or more 100BaseT Ethernet switches for supported types see http www peakaudio com CobraNet tested Ethernet html background source s CD Player radio receiver amplifiers and loudspeakers to carry the system output Autotransformers will be needed if you are using SVC1 wall mounted controllers note SVC1 20 units do not need autotransformers To the basic ControlMatrix equipment a keyboard monitor and mouse should be added to facilitate user set up and operation of the system Additionally users may add a Windows based PC for remote control 4 1 2 Install Central Equipment Generally the Q Host and the MediaMatrix will be installed together with other central equipment Ethernet switch background sources 5 etc in one or more 19 inch racks at a central location V4 0US September 2004 Page 29 MediaMatrix 22 ControlMatrix User s Guide Getting Started see also Section 8 1 Before powering or installing the MediaMatrix and Q Host and A Host if included remove the covers and inspect the internals ensure that all circuit boards the RAM and interconnecting cables are correctly seated in mating connectors as they may have dislodged during transit
161. ed page code When making a live page the operator must press and hold the Ptt button for the duration of the event The indicator in the Ptt button will initially illuminate amber while the system establishes audio paths checks for zone availability and plays a preamble if selected An amber indicator may be interpreted as Please Wait this message will be displayed on the LCD The indicator will turn green once the system has made the microphone live when this occurs the user can begin speaking into the microphone Thus for a live page a green indicator may be interpreted as Talk Now this message will be displayed on the LCD Usually the indicator will extinguish when the button is released If the system is equipped with MessageNet and a zone is unavailable store and forward operation will be invoked In this instance the user should talk upon seeing a green indicator but the page will be recorded and replayed under control of the system MessageNet also makes possible Delayed Release announcement where a message is recorded and released after a delay giving the operator an option to cancel the delayed announcement for an expanded description of this function see Section 9 5 2 4 Cancel If the PCUS page code selection is for a recorded message playback rather than a live page the Ptt button is used to start the message Again the button is pressed and held The indicator in the button will illuminate amber w
162. eference 6 ControlMatrix Console reference and 7 ControlMatrix Courtesy reference Here you ll find complete descriptions of how to use the software controls including illustrative screenshots If you need installation information try Chapter 8 Installation Reference This gives a guide to wiring and connectors and provides interconnection information for ControlMatrix equipment Lastly if you ve just installed a ControlMatrix system and are experiencing difficulties try reading the Debugging Chapter 10 and FAQ Chapter 11 it could be that your problem can be fixed quickly and easily V4 0US September 2004 Page 13 MediaMatrix ve 2 Concepts of ControlMatrix MediaMatrix 22 ControlMatrix User s Guide 2 1 Introduction ControlMatrix is a scaleable and flexible paging system founded upon on proven technology This chapter defines some of the key concepts that form the basis of ControlMatrix Definitions of ControlMatrix terms may be found in Chapter 13 Glossary 2 2 Definition of a Zone In ControlMatrix a Zone is defined as an indivisible entity that forms a destination for a live page or playback of recorded announcement A Zone can be considered as a group of contiguously located paging speakers typically but not always operating in a single acoustic space in which it makes sense to operate as a group 2 3 Definition of a Page ControlMatrix a page or paging event is one of the followin
163. efit the cover Use a 5 cable to link the CobraNet port on the rear of the S560 card to a CobraNet network port of an Ethernet switch Setup e Apply power to the system and run ControlMatrix Setup Select the Network menu On the left pane select Add Device then click the pull down button of the Device Type box and select MessageNet Card Edit the Device Name box to give it a meaningful name Move to the right pane Click to enable both boxes Monitor this device and Host will assign an IP address Enter the MAC address read from the 5560 card label including the dots between each pair of digits Choose an IP address for the card and enter it see Section 5 2 Select the host into which the card was installed using the Host Name drop down list box This will be the Q Host device name if the card has been added to a Q Host or the A Host device name if the card has been added to an A Host Set the Host Name box to the Q Host device name if the card has been added to a Q Host or the A Host device name if the card has been added to an A Host Next enter number of the card slot into which the card was inserted Setup the CobraNet Bundle allocations for Transmit and Receive following information provided in Section 5 3 Select Done to close the window Close Setup Follow the prompt to restart the system This will re generate the system files and restart the servers Open ControlMatrix Console and select the Diagnostics menu System Alarms Net
164. els 3 5 Software ControlMatrix software resides and operates Q Hosts and A Hosts software manages system operation and largely operates in the background User interaction for system management is facilitated by comprehensive graphical user interfaces V4 0US September 2004 Page 25 MediaMatrix 22 ControlMatrix User s Guide ControlMatrix Elements ControlMatrix user interfaces may be run either at the Q Host using attached keyboard monitor and mouse or remotely via TCP IP on any standard Windows based PC attached to the ControINet network Remote operation of user interfaces requires ControlMatrix Windows Client CMWC software installed on the remote PC One copy of this software is provided with each ControlMatrix system and further copies may be purchased as required for additional PCs ControlMatrix software requires the presence of a Q Host and cannot be run independently ControlMatrix has two main user interfaces ControlMatrix Console and ControlMatrix Setup described below these permit users to administrate and install system functions 3 5 1 ControlMatrix Console ControlMatrix Console allows access by management authorized personnel to the following functions e Simple configuration of paging station button functions page codes Paging Priority one of four levels of priority can be assigned to any message button station combination A fifth level is used for backgrounds Pre Announce Chimes
165. em ControlMatrix Acronym CMWC An application that presents ControlMatrix user interfaces Windows Client on any Windows based PC networked with the Q Host Employs Phindows ControlNet The component of ControlMatrix software that manages paging functions This term may also be used to describe the physical control network that links a Q Host to controlled and controlling devices see also Control Network Control Network distinct physical or virtual network set aside for conveying control data used by ControlNet ControlMatrix This includes IP monitoring SNMP monitoring and control and Network inter host communication Creative Audio The innovative and exciting Australian company that developed ControlMatrix Engineers and systems integrators extraordinaire No relation to Creative Labs we were first See www creativeaudio com au DAB Channel A single audio feed traveling on a MediaMatrix DAB DAB Digital Audio Bus used for transporting digital audio within the MediaMatrix Also referred to in MediaMatrix View File devices for the purpose of accessing the DAB Defined Code A Page Code that has been defined in ControlMatrix console for use on paging stations Delayed Release Mandatory store and forward of a live announcement An option to cancel the announcement is provided Demote Move an item one place towards the end of the sequence order Destination Zones paging zone that has been chosen as the
166. em is capable of collating and reporting alarms from a variety of sources ControlMatrix generates internal alarm states for each system component under the control of the Q Host These components may include wall mounted controllers paging stations A Hosts the MediaMatrix and other networked devices The alarm states can be viewed using ControlMatrix Console s System Alarms dialog see Section 6 7 1 ControlMatrix can also accept and report external alarm conditions generated by devices beyond the boundaries of the ControlMatrix system For example a UPS or fire warning system may close a relay to indicate some fault condition AHCI Alarm Card fitted to Q Host can be used to accept such signals The Q Host can subsequently be configured to report the state of the card s inputs as an alarm in the same way that it reports its own internal alarms External alarm configuration is carried out using the Alarm Manager in ControlMatrix Setup see Section 5 10 In addition the Alarm Manager can configure a Q Host to monitor the state of twelve predefined MediaMatrix view file control groups Alarm Point 1 Alarm Point 2 Alarm Point 12 The state of these control groups can be displayed along with all the other alarm states in Console s System Alarms dialog One application for this type of alarm monitoring might be to drive one of the Alarm Point control groups using a CABSs control voltage input control The CABS could be positi
167. ention 1s required This chapter addresses the steps required to configure a multi host system 12 4 Why multiple nodes As ControlMatrix systems grow 1 size the processing requirement on the central node increases with the additional paging and schedule workload In addition larger systems may imply a higher degree of criticality vested in the central system The long term reliability of such systems may be enhanced by adding additional redundant nodes The easiest way to increase the processing throughput of a Q Host is to offload the messaging workload of the S560 MessageNet cards to other hosts This is accomplished by adding one or two A Hosts to a system dedicated to message processing 12 4 5 Background A multi node ControlMatrix system is based on multiple PCs running the QNX operating system Building a multi node ControlMatrix system then becomes the same as building a multi node QNX network This chapter will cover the pertinent details of such a network in the context of ControlMatrix Additional details can be found in the QNX photon helpviewer under QNX4 25 Installation amp Configuration Networking Adding additional MediaMatrix frames 15 not included in this discussion ControlMatrix system that includes additional redundant MediaMatrix frames can be configured using ControlMatrix Setup Network dialog 1244 ControlMatrix Network Basic Setup Steps What type of hosts A ControlMatrix system may consist of
168. ents Recorded Message Event Event Label Baggage ance 5 Description Timing Destination Sequence Text Event is Enabled Enable BGM at 10 Background Enabled Assign to Gates Input Disabled The event will repeat every 05 minutes Hours Mins Hours Mins starting at 2 05 and finishing at 22 35 day Sunday the 1st January the 2nd February Every in the 3rd week of harch the 4th April the Sth May the Last p June r Day of week of month Y from June 2003 until finish date New Delete Duplicate Today Calendar None Today Calendar Scheduler is Enabled Apply Done Figure 6 14 Day of the week Events Next select the weeks of the month during which the event will be active Choose the first item every for the event to occur every week Otherwise select specific week s of the month Finally select the months of the year for which the event will be active It is possible to select multiple months or select every month Day of the month Events To define an event that only occurs only on certain days of the month check the Day of Month button Select the active days of the month from the first list box More than one day can be selected To select a range of days select the first day in the range then while holding down the Shift key select the last day in the range T
169. er of simultaneous record operations that might be required Remember that each TPU channel in the system requires a reserved record channel when in operation Thus for example for each TPU4 4 additional simultaneous record channels are required Divide the total number of simultaneous record operations by four then round up and call this number The larger of the numbers P and R will be the number of S560 cards required to cover the estimated peak activity for the system If at any time the system usage exceeds the estimated levels ControlMatrix will compensate by delaying some of the requested operations until utilization falls back to acceptable levels Systems that require only one S560 card may have the card installed in the Q Host Systems that require more than one card must have all the S560 MessageNet cards installed in A Hosts There must be no more than two S560 MessageNet cards per A Host There is an upper limit of four cards two A Hosts with two cards each for any given ControlMatrix system V4 0US September 2004 Page 221 MediaMatrix lt p ControlMatrix User s Guide Advanced Topics Note that this procedure provides a guide only Prior to finalizing system designs it is recommended that your MediaMatrix Electronics representative verify card numbers and host configurations V4 0US September 2004 Page 222 MediaMatrix 22 ControlMatrix User s Guide Advanced Topics 12 6 Redundant Operation 12 6 1
170. er size paper located in the documents folder The template has an array of correctly sized borders that can be edited printed divided and inserted PCU Login Status display When a PCU is logged in on line the Power No Network indicator is illuminated constantly When it is off line the indicator flashes A PCU that is off line will not appear to respond to button presses and obviously will not be able to page RMPI Selection Programming on PCU3 and PCU4 units units provide remote microphone capabilities for PCU3 and PCU4 paging stations RMP units include no selection facilities however the PCU3 or PCU4 can be programmed to provide the required page code selection for the associated RMP1 As delivered from the factory a PCU3 is set to select Button 1 when a connected is operated new PCUA is set so that an RMPI connected to it will operate the current selection on the PCUA To re program a PCU3 for a different selection e Make a note of the current device address if it is necessary to maintain the same address e Set the device address to 0 e Remove power from the PCUS e Hold the PCU3 microphone switch while reapplying power and continue to hold the switch until the procedure is finished V4 0US September 2004 Page 134 MediaMatrix lt p ControlMatrix User s Guide Installation Reference The existing RMPI selection will now be displayed on the selection button lamps Pressing a
171. er supply is 12VDC and a two conductor cable is required Cable lengths of up to 900 feet 300 meters are possible however long cable runs should employ 18 ga wires One or more MediaMatrix PCU 2100 power supplies are required to power PCU SVC and SCP devices The PCU 2100 has two identical power supplies that may be used in dual mode for up to sixteen PCUs and twenty wall mounted controllers or redundant mode for up to eight PCUs and ten controllers Redundant mode provides fail safe operation in that if one of the supplies fails the other carries the load For redundant mode connections are made only to the Bank A terminals of the PCU 2100 For PCUs each supply has four separate current limited three terminal outputs A maximum of two PCUs should be connected to each of the four outputs total of eight There are also four two terminal outputs for the wall plate devices Ten controller devices may connect in any convenient pattern to these output terminals See additional information supplied with the PCU 2100 Power Supply V4 0US September 2004 Page 129 MediaMatrix lt p ControlMatrix User s Guide Installation Reference WARNING PCU power pinouts on the rear of a PCU 2100 are NOT THE SAME as those on PCU devices Power wiring to the PCU 2100 must comply with the pinout detail printed on the rear panel Power wiring to PCU devices is detailed below The polarity of the two pole connectors on wall mounted controller devic
172. eration will be invoked In this instance the user should talk upon seeing a green indicator but the page will be recorded and replayed under control of the system MessageNet also makes possible Delayed Release announcements where an announcement is recorded and released after a delay and as soon as destination zones are available giving the operator an option to cancel the announcement This mode applies to particular page codes each of which must be configured for Delayed Release see Section 6 2 1 While making a delayed announcement Status indications are as for a standard live announcement 1 e Amber Please Wait Green Talk Now After the operator has finished making the announcement and the Ptt switch is released the Status LED will flash amber for five seconds If the operator presses the Ptt switch within this five second period the delayed announcement will be discarded and the system will return to idle status If five seconds elapses without a Ptt switch press the delayed announcement will be released for playback If the PCU3 page code selection is for a recorded message playback rather than a live page the Ptt switch is used to start the message Again the switch is pressed and held The Status indicator will illuminate amber when the switch is pressed While the switch is held there will be one of two outcomes a The amber indicator will change to green and begin to flash If this occurs the message repl
173. es assembly Z way Courtesy Text Insertion fcm vaves assembly 3 way fcmAvaves assembly 67 cm waves assembly 10 wav cm waves assembly 36 wav Figure 6 24 The message list page of the Courtesy Configuration dialog To create a new sequence press the New button at the lower left side of the dialog as shown in Figure 6 24 This will create a sequence with only the text insertion added Pressing V4 0US September 2004 Page 112 MediaMatrix 22 ControlMatrix User s Guide ControlMatrix Console Duplicate instead of New will create a copy of the currently selected sequence in the list on the left side of the dialog To delete a sequence select it in the list on the left side of the dialog and press Delete To prevent accidental removal a prompt will appear requesting confirmation of this command Once a sequence has been created messages can be added and their particular order within the sequence can be arranged It should be noted that the sequence can have one courtesy text insertion although this insertion can be placed anywhere within the sequence Up to ten messages are permitted in one sequence To add a message to the list select it from the Available Messages list and press Add By default it will appear at the end of the Sequence of Messages list Selecting a message from the Sequence of Messages list and pressing Remove will clear the item from the sequence To change
174. es is not critical suits AC or DC Polarity of the and terminals of the three pole power connectors on PCUs is not critical and may be AC or DC however it is mandatory that the OVCT terminal is on the correct pin center If the and one of the or supply lines are swapped serious damage may occur to the PCU wired incorrectly and possibly to other PCUs CABs and the power supplies in the system Double check all power connections before applying power Hot 54 Audio Shield o S OV CT WO cs a ga amm AC Ri esM A lt he S 2 oe C RS485 Hot Wall Mount PCU Power Connections Desktop PCU 9pin Connections Figure 8 2 Device Power Connections Desktop mount PCUs have a flexible cable tail terminating in a D9 connector The PCP2 connector plate provides a mating D9 connector with adaptation to three Euroblock connectors on the rear Power RS485 and Audio may be connected to these using standard 3 pin Euroblock connectors 8 2 4 Audio Interconnection ControlMatrix uses balanced connections for all audio inputs and outputs Screened pair cable must be used for all audio interconnections An appropriate cable is 22ga foil shield polyethylene insulation PVC jacket Belden 8761 or equivalent Cable shields must be connected at both ends for all interconnects At the time of printing this manual audio connection pinouts differ on some ControlMatrix device
175. ext indicate that the device is operating normally A red indication means that a fault has occurred V4 0US September 2004 Page 117 MediaMatrix 22 ControlMatrix User s Guide ControlMatrix Console The Network Devices tab lists all the networked devices monitored by the ControlMatrix system Again if the device is working normally the device record will be displayed with blue text A fault condition is indicated using red text The CA485 Devices tab indicates the status of the wall mounted controllers and paging station devices present on the CA485 network and finally the Miscellaneous Alarms tab displays any alarms that are inappropriate for the other categories The System Alarms viewer is capable of generating an audible alarm termed the buzzer whenever a new fault condition is detected This is the Q Host s internal speaker To enable or disable the buzzer use the Enable Disable button underneath the alarm viewer panel To mute the buzzer click the Acknowledge button along side the buzzer button The Acknowledge button will flash until pressed following an alarm condition The Alarms Dialog can also be made to pop up when any new alarm is detected by the system Check the Pop up alarm panel button to enable this feature Click the Done button to close down the System Alarms page 6 7 2 System Log The System Log viewer Figure 6 29 provides detailed information about the current ControlMatrix system activity in a scrollable
176. eypad that allows selection from up to 999 page codes Phindows A software application that presents QNX user interfaces e g ControlMatrix Console and ControlMatrix Setup in a Windows environment Phindows runs under any Windows version true up to at least Windows XP PID Process ID A number allocated by an operating system to a software process running on a node Play Preamble A selection to enable the play of a preamble in a paging event see preamble Pop up Alarm The System Alarms panel can be made to appear on a visible area of panel ControlMatrix Console when new alarms become active Preamble A short chime bell or other musical phrase played as an introduction preamble preamble bells to a live page or recorded message Priority A relative importance level associated with various ControlMatrix program events Five levels are defined All backgrounds are at the lowest level below all paging while levels of low medium high and highest may be assigned to pages and messages Promote Move an item one place towards the beginning of the sequence order Q Host A centrally located box that executes ControlNet software QNX A POSIX compliant real time operating system QNX Process software process running on a node using the QNX operating system RATC MediaMatrix protocol for remote TCP IP control of MediaMatrix devices Recorded Message See Message Recorder See Wave Recorder Refresh Update the information in an adjacent dia
177. feature the view file in use must use the BuddyLink device to arbitrate on which MediaMatrix frame is active and to suppress CAB control and CobraNet activity from the inactive frame See the MediaMatrix help system for help on this device V4 0US September 2004 Page 224 MediaMatrix 22 ControlMatrix User s Guide Advanced Topics 12 7 Network System Interlinking ControlMatrix installations that service extremely large numbers of paging zones or sites spread over a large geographical area may benefit from being broken up into smaller less complex sub systems The Network System Interlinking NSI software module provides a mechanism for inter system paging Both voice announcements from PCUs or TPUs and the playback of sequences of pre recorded announcements including courtesy text to speech are supported under this regime Network System Interlinking employs a custom TCP IP based network protocol in its implementation This means that NSI is possible wherever ControlMatrix systems have IP network connectivity Systems can be on the same IP subnet or accessible via an IP gateway or router 12 7 1 Setting up a system for NSI Despite being a complex concept NSI is very simple to setup The system is configured just as it would be if it were a stand alone system It must also have an NSI modular license installed A list of available paging zones is constructed and saved onto the local Q Host see section 5 9 Zone Attributes Configur
178. g Alive announcement from a source with a Press to talk Ptt button e g a Paging Station e Assignment of a User Input to perform paging triggered by the presence of signal from the input e Message playback either from the system scheduler or operator action e Message playback from the store and forward system All paging events have a priority level This priority determines what paging event will go live in zone when a zone has several events competing for access This is discussed in detail in Section 2 6 2 4 Store and Forward In cases where a destination Zone for a paging event is busy with a higher priority page a technique known as store and forward is used in systems equipped with MessageNet only The system saves the message and plays it into the zone when the destination zone is no longer in use The advantage of store and forward is that it allows a user to make a page without the concern of having to check the availability of destination zones ControlMatrix seamlessly organizes all aspects of the replay or forwarding of the original page 2 5 Messaging Messaging within a paging system allows recorded messages to be played at scheduled times or triggered by a system user ControlMatrix implements messaging using MessageNet which manages recording and playback of wave WAV files throughout the system V4 0US September 2004 Page 15 MediaMatrix lt p ControlMatrix User s Guide Message files can
179. g Unit 136 8 3 3 Setting up TPU2 TPUA Telephone Paging Units 136 8 3 4 Setting up an 5560 MessageNet 138 8 3 5 Setting up an AHC1 Alarm 138 8 3 6 Setting MediaMatrix CAB 141 8 3 7 Setting up a PCU 2100 Power Supply rre oro thai onere paa nes 141 9 Using Devices 9 1 Using an SVC1 Volume Control 4 147 9 11 ASSERTION de sn e ibo Ed I Sen Rb Du BERNER debe 147 S Ti2 a ar od ret p de pto ple ict eds 147 9 2 Using SVC2 Volume Control 148 9 2 10 Description een aL au Deme nd qu 148 9 2 2 Operation PEE 148 9 3 Using an SCP Conlroller RR RERUM 148 941 Descmplob Seriene o D De HE Dt DE DUE DEUDA DIE UA Puls Duke Dads 148 9 3 2 ODOEFSO scc tc eet e eru I 149 9 4 Using a PCU1 Paging 149 V4 0US September 2004 Page 4 MediaMatrix 22 ControlMatrix User s Guide Table of Contents 149 SP MERO in
180. g multiple MediaMatrix frames or additional customized options can be accommodated by request Each ControlMatrix host is housed in a 2RU 19 inch rack chassis 3 3 Field Equipment Field equipment comprises hardware items located in decentralized positions in close proximity to users of a ControlMatrix system 3 3 1 Paging Stations There are two main Paging Station types in the ControlMatrix system simple four choice and fully featured 999 choice keypad and LCD display Each type of paging station also has variants for mounting style and microphone types a hand held communications type microphone a wall mounted unit with or without security key switch or a desktop case with gooseneck microphone For both types of stations paging may be live from the microphone or via store and forward for MessageNet equipped systems Paging station buttons may also release sequences of recorded messages PCUI Desktop Four Button Station PCUI Paging Control Units are desktop units that may direct live pages or messages to four distinct groups of paging zones Page codes are defined and assigned to individual PCUI buttons in ControlMatrix Console Section 6 2 1 Codes are selected for use by operating the buttons on the PCUI PCU2 Desktop Keypad LCD Station PCU2 Paging Control Units provide a simple control surface for accessing up to 999 distinct page codes As for PCUIs page codes are defined and assigned to PCU2s in ControlMatrix
181. g systems Chapter 5 for detailed information on how to configure a system using ControlMatrix Setup and Chapter 6 for a guide to managing the system using ControlMatrix Console If you are unfamiliar with the basic concepts and elements of a ControlMatrix system first read Chapters 2 and 3 If you are unfamiliar with the terms used to describe ControlMatrix see Chapter 13 Glossary If you encounter problems check Chapters 10 Debugging and 11 Frequently Asked Questions The first step with a newly delivered system 15 to check what you have Then you can install it configure it and begin to play with it 4 1 1 Have you got what it takes First check the equipment delivered to ensure you have what it takes to assemble a ControlMatrix system A basic ControlMatrix system has a MediaMatrix with at least one CobraNet DPU card a Q Host and MediaMatrix CABs for interfacing audio devices and paging stations large ControlMatrix system may also have one or two A Hosts You must have one or more PCUI PCU2 PCU3 PCUA or PCUS paging stations and a suitable number of PCU 2100 power supplies for these In addition your system may have a number of wall mounted controllers SVC1 SVC2 SCP to adjust the volume of speakers and select backgrounds in rooms remote from the main control point Open the shipping boxes and identify the various articles Confirm that quantities supplied match the purchase order and that all items have been deliver
182. ge code initiate an event and make spoken announcements via a microphone Each page code comprises two primary elements the first is the source of the page live page or recorded message and the second is the destination zone or group of zones to which the source will be directed When a valid page code has been selected pressing the Press to talk Ptt button will initiate a paging event Note that a page code may only have message sources if the system is fitted with the MessageNet option 9 5 2 Operation A PCUZ2 is a desktop control unit with the following features Microphone Press to talk button and two color Status indicator Keypad LCD Display Power No Network Indicator These features combine to allow an operator complete control of paging functions 9 5 2 1 Microphone A sensitive noise rejecting goose neck microphone is provided on the PCU2 front panel for spoken announcements Use the gooseneck to adjust the microphone to a workable position Speak clearly into the microphone at a distance of approximately 2 inches 50mm Speaking more closely may compromise speech intelligibility while speaking further away may reduce paging level and allow the intrusion of background noise If the PCU2 is lifted off the desk during announcements grasp the case do not lift the PCU2 by the microphone gooseneck 9 5 2 2 Press to talk Ptt Button Status indicator The Press to talk button is located on the front panel
183. gged in the left side of the display will indicate the firmware version on the top line in the form PCU2 4 x yz where x yz version and RS485 address on the bottom line in the form Addr nn where nn is the address If the Address switches are set to an address of zero the Addr display will show as Addr Zero and this will flash The right side of the display will show six dots on the top line and six on the bottom line These twelve correspond to the twelve keypad switches If any of the switches is operated the dot will change to the number of the switch and gt for the lt lt and gt gt keys This function may be used for button testing If the PCU2 PCU4 or PCUS is logged in pressing all three lt lt 0 and gt gt keys simultaneously will cause the LCD to display the firmware version and address as above but not the key test display PCUI and PCU3 Firmware Version and Address Display Firmware version and RS485 Address are displayed on PCU 1 and PCU3 units using the LEDs 1n the Selection buttons The information can be read by holding the Ptt switch on as power is applied to the unit with a non zero Address set The units flash 6 binary coded numbers on the Selection button LEDs representing the following string where the numbers inserted here represent the position in the sequence Revision 1 23 Address 456 V4 0US September 2004 Page 133 MediaMatrix 22 ControlMatrix User s Guide Installation Reference No
184. he number keys there are next gt gt and previous lt lt keys that allow the selection of the next defined global page code to the one currently selected Page codes comprise three digits To select a page code key in the digits including leading zeros or use the next or previous keys As digits are entered on the keypad they appear in the top left of the LCD the combination of numbers changes the system searches to see if the numeric combination represents a valid selection 9 5 2 4 LCD Display A sixteen character two line rear illuminated display provides visual feedback to the operator of the selected page code page code description and paging status For clarity the display is divided into three regions as follows V4 0US September 2004 Page 154 MediaMatrix lt p ControlMatrix User s Guide Using Devices Display Region 1 Top Line first three character spaces Display Region 2 Bottom Line Display Region 3 Top Line remaining character spaces Display Region 1 Page Code As page codes are entered on the keypad they appear in Region 1 Display Region 2 Description When a page code is fully entered on the keypad the description of that page code as configured in ControlMatrix Console see Section 6 2 1 will appear in Region 2 In place of the page code description one of three other terms may be displayed in Region 2 as follows Please Wait This display indicates that the PCU is c
185. he install file building and copying must be performed for every node on the network except node 1 Creating an Initialization Script The initialization script for each node is node dependent Since the node number has changed the initialization script must also be updated On each node execute the command etc config sysinit 1 etc config sysinit n Connecting the network together Nodes must be interconnected on a network in order that they can communicate with each other Networking involves firstly providing the physical interconnections via a single Ethernet switch or VLAN then following the procedure below Reboot each node in turn Reboot each node in turn and watch for the normal boot up messages on the screen Check the network operation Once all of the nodes have booted if all are connected together on the network network operation can be checked Login to node 1 and execute the command alive f This will cause node 1 to search for all other nodes on the network and report their status If all is well a report will be displayed showing each of the node numbers and for the status If any nodes show down there is a problem Add the second network connection If all is well connect the second Ethernet port on each node to the second network or VLAN Execute the command netmap The display will show all of the nodes their MAC address for each network and whether communications have been e
186. he microphone in the clip after use V4 0US September 2004 Page 158 MediaMatrix lt p ControlMatrix User s Guide Using Devices Warning Poor sound quality will result if the PCU3 microphone is not used at very close proximity to the mouth 9 6 2 2 Press to talk Ptt Button Status indicator The Press to talk switch is located on the side of the microphone Associated with this switch and located on PCU3 front panel is a Status indicator that may illuminate amber or green The primary action required to initiate a paging event from a PCU3 is pressing the Ptt switch This action either sets up the system for a live page announcement into the microphone or releases a recorded message to the zones associated with the selected page code When making a live page the operator must press and hold the Ptt switch for the duration of the event The Status indicator will initially illuminate amber while the system establishes audio paths checks for zone availability and plays a preamble if selected An amber indicator may be interpreted as Please Wait The indicator will turn green once the system has made the microphone live when this occurs the user can begin speaking into the microphone Thus for a live page a green indicator may be interpreted as Talk Now Usually the indicator will extinguish when the switch is released If the system is equipped with MessageNet and a zone is unavailable store and forward op
187. he network drivers Take note of these two entries It is now necessary to modify the sysinit n file so that it may work with the new logical network numbers Each of the entries above contains the driver that talks directly to the Ethernet hardware It needs to know which logical network number it is connected to so that the Net software knows which driver to send data for a given logical network By default the hosts are shipped talking to networks one and two This needs to be modified for A Hosts to talk to network 1 and the logical net that you define Instead of modifying the second network in an A Host it may be necessary to add second NIC to a Q Host Adding a line to the sysinit n file also does this The current Net ether lines are generated automatically Unfortunately the automatic mechanism does not cope with logical networks other than 1 and 2 It also does not cope with on board Ethernet ports as used by ControlMatrix Host single board computers By moving to other network numbers the automatic mechanism is being removed The sysinit n file looks like this Image boot sys boot v Image boot sys Proc32 1 1 Image boot sys S1lib32 Image boot sys Slib16 Image bin Fsys Image bin Fsys eide fsys Ndsk0 n0 hd0 5 0 eide alf0 i14 Image bin mount p dev hd0 0 dev hd0 0t77 Image bin sinit TERM qnxm export NODE 1 export KBD en CA 101 kbd export ABLANG en export CON KBD USA
188. hen the button is pressed While the button is held there will be one of two outcomes a The amber indicator will change to green and begin to flash If this occurs the message replay request has been accepted and the LCD will display Req Queued see Section 9 5 2 4 The message will then be placed in a queue and will be played as soon as all zones for which it is destined are available As soon as the green indicator flashes the operator can release the Ptt button and the indicator will extinguish OR b The amber indicator extinguishes If this occurs the message request has failed The LCD will display Req Failed see Section 9 5 2 4 The operator should release the Ptt button and investigate the reason for failure If the unit is fitted with a key operated security switch the Ptt button will not function unless the key is turned fully clockwise 9 8 2 3 Selection Keypad A twelve button keypad telephone style located on the right hand side of the PCUS s front panel is used to select the required page code In addition to the number keys there are next gt gt and previous keys that allow the selection of the next defined global page code to the one currently selected Page codes comprise three digits To select a page code key in the digits including leading zeros or use the next or previous keys As digits are entered on the keypad they appear in the top left of the LCD As the combination of numbers changes the
189. hese computers can have IP addresses in the range 192 168 10 0 to 192 168 10 7 each of these correspond to one of the x states in the Matching Subnet line Once the actual IP address and subnet mask are known the range of IP addresses that the computer will recognise can be determined and hence it is possible to determine if two computers are on the same Subnet V4 0US September 2004 Page 197 MediaMatrix ve 12 Advanced Topics MediaMatrix lt p ControlMatrix User s Guide Advanced Topics 12 1 Advanced System Logging Features ControlMatrix has the ability to generate a multitude of log outputs By default all logging is generated to a single log cm syslog log This is the log file that is viewable in ControlMatrix Console Additional log files are generated when new entries are added to a text file Log files for a specific purpose e g operator activity logging or to send logging to a modem or printer 12 1 4 Background Various types of activity within the ControlMatrix system generate entries for the system log Each entry is classified according to type The following types are defined Classification Mask Bit Description LOG WARN 0x0001 Equipment Failure LOG START 0x0002 Normal process start up or shutdown LOG EMERGENCY 0x0004 Emergency alarm inputs LOG PAGE 0x0008 Paging Activity LOG CFG ERR 0x00
190. hese will occur simultaneously 11 3 ControlMatrix Setup FAQs I am trying to make some zones above number 10 into SVC2 controlled zones but I keep getting an error dialogue box that says Only zone numbers 1 to 10 can be SVC2 zones Why does this restriction apply V4 0US September 2004 Page 195 MediaMatrix 22 ControlMatrix User s Guide FAQs Al Every SVC2 controlled zone must have four outputs assigned to it in the Media Matrix s PAV file The nn zones device supplied with the ControlMatrix system has capability for this facility whether not it is used The more SVC2 zone capability allowed the more DSP resources required In an effort to balance system design and flexibility against excessive reservation of resources a compromise was reached that only ten the first ten zones could be SVC2 controlled Systems with more than ten SVC2 zones are available to special order 02 Why do the input numbers the System Input Configuration start at 101 2 MediaMatrix complier needs to share DSP tasks between processing devices and these can be on different DSP cards The complier therefore needs access to inter board connections that are automatically allocated to the low numbered DAB channels during compilation ControlMatrix also has pre allocated resources for S560 MessageNet cards and other internal system requirements in that space A system that requires more than 155 inputs is very large and not likely to be
191. hich uses a CAB as the physical interface to a CA485 network CAB ID A unique identifier physically set by the CAB Address switches on a CAB front panel It allows a MediaMatrix to distinguish one CAB from others Clear Disconnection of a User Input assignment Clear is also used in the context of clearing out a page from a zone on release of Ptt switch Clear In The prefix to a window indicating the amount of real time in minutes that must expire before a User Input assignment is cleared CMWC See ControlMatrix Windows Client V4 0US September 2004 Page 229 ControlMatrix User s Guide Glossary MediaMatrix 22 CobraNet A method of transporting high quality digital audio over standard Ethernet infrastructure See www peakaudio com CobraNet Background htm CobraNet network A distinct physical or virtual network set aside for conveying CobraNet network traffic Code Barred A Global Page Code that is not available for use at the keypad paging station being operated This particular keypad paging station is prevented from using this Page Code Control Matrix Peavey s MediaMatrix based system solution for advanced paging applications Control Matrix The graphical user interface used for day to day management and administration Console of a ControlMatrix system ControlMatrix The graphical user interface used for installation configuration and re Setup configuration of a ControlMatrix syst
192. hose zones required by this PCU V4 0US September 2004 Page 155 MediaMatrix lt p ControlMatrix User s Guide Using Devices Delay This display indicates that at least one of the zones assigned to this code has paging activity at a priority equal to or higher than the priority of this paging code In a system with store and forward capability a page made now from this PCU would be delayed and released when the busy zones become available In a system without store and forward a page made now from this PCU will be lost hence the user should delay making the page until the Delay message is gone N A This display indicates that the selected code is not accessible to this PCU2 It will be accompanied by ether a Code Barred or Undefined Code display in Region 2 of the LCD Please Wait This display indicates that the Ptt button has been pressed and one or more of three conditions exists the preamble is currently playing e the zones are being set up e there is some delay in the system waiting for resources e g a wave player This display will usually correspond to an amber indication on the LED in the Ptt button and indicates that the operator should wait for the Talk Now display before making an announcement Req Failed This display indicates that the Ptt button has been pressed but the request has failed for some reason The cause may be that there is an error in the configuration file for that PCU the
193. ht channels of audio while recording four channels One 5560 card may be installed in a Q Host Where systems need greater simultaneous audio capabilities one or two A Hosts may be added each capable of hosting up to an additional two 5560 cards The MessageNet system will replay standard 16 bit 48KHz mono WAV files from the system s hard drive or optionally from either RAM or flash RAM non volatile storage 3 2 3 MediaMatrix Each ControlMatrix system requires a MediaMatrix to perform audio routing and signal processing functions MediaMatrix size and processing power will depend on the size and complexity of the overall system A CobraNet equipped MediaMatrix is mandatory in each ControlMatrix solution Figure 3 1 below details the interactions between ControlMatrix hosts and MediaMatrix in a typical ControlMatrix system Remote Control of Signs Telephone Paging RS232 From Paging _ Es Stations Control In over CobraNet Control Out over CobraNet auons Wallplates Wallplates O e Control In via TCP IP Control Out via TCP IP gt conirol to control from Q Host m FIDS etc 7 Sc FIDS etc Wo BN 5 5 2 O g A Host 9
194. iaMatrix These values should match the bundle numbers set up in the MediaMatrix View File If the device is of type Other IP Device first enter its IP address If this card is to be monitored by the system check the Monitor this device button If it is necessary for the Q Host to assign the specified IP address to the IP device when it comes on line check the Host will assign an IP address button and then enter the MAC address of the device Device Type Specific Details Device Type Other IP Device Device Name 15 IP Address 10 60 4 123 Monitor this device Device Name Device Type IP Address ghost1 Q Host 10 21 1 59 2 Host will assign an IP address MediaMatrix 22 ahost1 msgnet1 medi amatrix1 ecard courtesyhost mcswi tch02 amp Host MessageNet Card 10 60 4 201 MediaMatrix 10 21 1 20 Ethernet Card Courtesy Host 10 21 1 214 Other Device 10 60 4 123 Other IP Device 10 60 4 224 Add Device Remove Devices Address 00 00 00 00 00 00 Figure 5 5 Other IP devices If the Ethernet card device type is selected specify the host into which the card will be installed using the drop down list labeled Host Name Finally select the logical network ID that will be used to identify this particular network interface Logical network IDs must be unique for each Ethernet card installed in a given host V4 0US September 2004 Page 48 ControlMatr
195. ible to add and remove multiple zones with one operation Select a range of consecutive zones by selecting the first zone then holding down the Shift key select the last zone Alternatively zones can be selected at random by holding down the Ctrl key and clicking on the desired zone names V4 0US September 2004 Page 99 ControlMatrix User s Guide ControlMatrix Console Recorded Message Event Enable BGM at 10 Background Enabled MasterSystem Main Concourse Main Concourse MasterSystem Terminal H Terminal amp MasterSystem Gate Lounge 16 Terminal MasterSystem Gate Lounge 17 FE Golden Wing Lounge El Food Court 95 Gate Lounge 13 Gate Lounge 14 i B Gate Lounge 15 Gate Lounge 16 Figure 6 16 Selecting Destination Zones Each message playback event will be assigned a playback priority low medium high or highest Use the drop down list on the Destination tab to modify the priority Message Sequence Selection The Sequence tab is used to compose a list of messages to be played The Available Messages list presents lists of wave files WAV organized into directories Recorded Message Event Baggage ance 5 Enable BGM at 10 Background Assign to Gates Input cm waves baggage way Pause 1 seconds wayv cmAvaves baggagebelt wav O Pause 10 seconds wav Pause 2 seconds wav 3 Pause 5 seconds wav airstaff wav O alarmbells wav D alarmtest wav D baggage
196. ice chain use the DSP link ports see User s Manual Use only the DSP link to chain units together do not parallel the serial connections Power The power for the TPU2 4 is supplied using an external power supply This supply is a multi voltage regulator that is supplied with the TPU2 4 unit It connects to a DIN5 port marked Power on the rear of the TPU2 4 V4 0US September 2004 Page 137 MediaMatrix 22 ControlMatrix User s Guide Installation Reference 8 3 4 Setting up an S560 MessageNet Card 5560 MessageNet Messaging Cards are typically factory installed in Hosts before a system 15 supplied However additional cards may be added to a system If this is done a number of parameters will need to be configured An 560 is a full length PCI card It must be installed in the Q Host or in an A Host if required for larger systems Installation e Carefully remove the card from its anti static packaging while wearing an anti static wristband or similar grounding device Remove the cover of the Q Host or A Host in which the card is to be installed e On the rear of the S560 is a MAC Address unique to each card Record this number for later use when running ControlMatrix Setup e Find a free PCI card slot in the Q Host or A Host into which the card will fit The first S560 must be in the lowest slot slot 1 If a second card is fitted it must be in the slot above the first slot 2 Carefully fit the 5560 to the host and r
197. ile selecting the items to be removed one by one To save changes made to the license keys click the Done button 5 3 Network Devices Configuration Dialog The Network Devices Configuration Dialog Figure 5 2 is used to define or remove devices that reside on the ControlMatrix network The devices can be categorized into eight types Q Host A Host C Host Courtesy Host 5560 MessageNet Card MediaMatrix Ethernet Card 4 x Serial Card and Other IP device Q Host This is the central controller for a ControINet system and runs ControlNet software using the QNX real time operating system By default this host will be QNX host node 1 This device may be configured to contain a 5560 MessageNet card for smaller systems A Host This is a device that may contain up to two S560 MessageNet cards It is used to expand the recorded message capability of a ControlMatrix system C Host Courtesy Host This is a Windows based PC residing on the ControlNet network and running the Speechify Text to Speech engine S560 MessageNet Card This card provides message playback and recording capabilities for the ControlMatrix system Each card is capable of eight simultaneous message playback channels and four record channels MediaMatrix This is the Peavey MediaMatrix unit that performs audio routing and signal conditioning necessary for paging Ethernet Card This is a standard PCI 100baseT Ethernet card installed in either a Q Host or Host
198. ils IP Address 10 60 4 201 Monitor this device 4 Host will assign an IP address MAC Address r Message Card Host ahost1 Card Slot 1 Host Name CobraNet Configuration Transmit Bundle 3001 3011 Receive Bundle Add Device Remove Devices Figure 5 4 MessageNet card devices If the device is MessageNet card first enter the CobraNet network IP address of the card see discussion on IP address selection for O Hosts Next check the Monitor this V4 0US September 2004 Page 47 ControlMatrix User s Guide ControlMatrix Console device button if the ControlMatrix system needs to indicate whether or not this device is on line It is necessary for the Q Host to assign the specified IP address to the 5560 MessageNet card when it comes on line It is mandatory to check the Host will assign an IP address button and then enter the MAC address of the S560 MessageNet card Each card has a label on the rear panel displaying the MAC address The next step is to specify the name of the Q Host or A Host containing the Select the host from the drop down list Then enter the card slot into which the S560 MessageNet card was installed This will be a number between 1 and 3 and is printed on the Q Host s chassis Finally configure both the transmit and receive CobraNet bundles that the card uses to transfer digital audio to and from the Med
199. in the field equipment Large systems may benefit significantly from deploying optic fibre cables between switches This approach not only offers bandwidth advantages but also significantly increases allowable distance between Ethernet switches When choosing Ethernet switches it is advisable to use types approved for use with CobraNet see http www peakaudio com CobraNet tested_Ethernet html switches The switch es will need to be configured before they can be used Configuration procedures will vary according to the unit consult the manufacturer s documentation supplied with the switch Some models of switch allow all the switches in a system to be configured from a port of any switch V4 0US September 2004 Page 127 MediaMatrix 22 ControlMatrix User s Guide Installation Reference in the network provided that a default VLAN is maintained for this purpose If there are sufficient ports spare once all of the system ports have been reserved this facility is worth preserving Determine the number of ports required for each VLAN including at least one spare on each switch if possible and assign the ports to the LANs While the system will work using cables directly between the switch and equipment ports this method of wiring can become cumbersome and difficult to install and debug especially in large systems RJ45 data patch bays can assist in alleviating these problems 8 2 2 RS485 Network CA485 Devices SVC SCP PC
200. ing Station Configuration ccce 193 11 2 Schedule S 193 201 Configuration 185086 nines ER 193 11 2 2 Recorded Message 195 11 2 3 Background 2 eee duet 195 V4 0US September 2004 Page 5 MediaMatrix 22 ControlMatrix User s Guide Table of Contents 11 3 ControlMatrix Setup 195 11 4 ControlMatrix Courtesy 5 22 22 2 196 11 5 197 12 Advanced Topics 12 4 Advanced System Logging 199 QN NISI Ie cni ELEME rent 199 12 1 2 Basic Procedure for Setting up 1005 000000222 199 121 9 UNCP IDS TANS taedet potuto deed 201 12 2 Creating New Pre Recorded 201 12 2 1 Background som ote tetto eh 202 12 2 2 Audio and Acoustic 202 12 2 3 Message Content and Delivery 2 4 202 12 2 4 Basic Procedurer ment 203 12 2 5 Text Association for 5 10
201. inputs follow sequentially On the output side the first 40 outputs correspond to the first 10 zones These are zones where SVC2s can be used and allowance has been made for the four background outputs for each zone From the top they are laid out in sequence as follows Zone 1 Background 1 Zone Background 2 Zone Background 3 Zone Background 4 Zone 2 Background 1 V4 0US September 2004 Page 36 MediaMatrix 22 ControlMatrix User s Guide Getting Started Zone 10 Background 3 Zone 10 Background 4 Following the first 40 outputs are another 40 outputs one each for zones 11 to 50 The same pattern of outputs applies for the nn zone devices with more or less zones SVC2s are only supported for the first 10 zones It is possible to use Zones 1 to 10 for zones not containing SVC2 however only the first of the four background outputs should be used Once ControlMatrix Setup has been run and the Q Host is running the names of the devices allocated to each channel are transferred automatically to the View File This feature can be used as an aid to system configuration when wiring inputs and or a means of checking that correct connections have been made It is also necessary to place the CAB devices from the ControlMatrix folder appropriate to your installation At least one CAB device must be used to allow the RS485 network to the paging stations to be created CAB devices are defined for four possible networks however it is usual to
202. irst paging event V4 0US September 2004 Page 16 MediaMatrix lt p ControlMatrix User s Guide If the second paging event is a live page it will be routed to the store and forward system for later playback The priority of the stored message will be retained for use when the message is ultimate played out of the store and forward system to resolve any conflicts that may arise at that time If the second event is the assignment of a User Input the assignment will be made and the User Input routed immediately to the chosen zone If the second paging event is a message replay it will be delayed until the zone becomes available at that priority at which time the message will be played 2 6 3 If the second paging event is higher priority than the first If the second paging event is higher priority than the first the first paging event will be interrupted The state of the system at the lower interrupted priority will be stored for when the interruption is completed at which time the state will be restored In all cases though no attempt will be made by the system to replay any or all of an interrupted message whether that message was a live page or a recorded message It is recommended that paging events be assigned priority according to the following guidelines Paging Event Recommended Priority Emergency Paging General Paging Manually Released Announcements Scheduled Announcements 2 7 System Alarms A ControlMatrix syst
203. isplay Region 3 Status Text appearing in Region 3 indicates the status of the PCUS the selection or the paging activity as follows Idle Indicates that the page code selected is defined and available for use by the PCU2 and that there are no busy zones in the selected code No Network Indicates that the PCU is not connected to a functioning CA485 network This display is accompanied by flashing of the Power No Network indicator The cause may be that there are no servers running on the Q Host the MediaMatrix and hence the local CAB is not configured correctly there is a cabling fault there is a hardware fault affecting communications or the PCU is not configured correctly in the Q Host V4 0US September 2004 Page 168 MediaMatrix lt p ControlMatrix User s Guide Using Devices Busy Each valid paging code facilitates a paging event to one or more zones This display indicates that at least one of the zones assigned to this PCU currently has paging activity from some other source but at a priority that would allow a page from this PCU to go out However the page from the other source would be lost to those zones required by this PCU Delay This display indicates that at least one of the zones assigned to this code has paging activity at a priority equal to or higher than the priority of this paging code In a system with store and forward capability a page made now from this PCU would be delayed and released when the
204. ith another Q Host for redundant systems V4 0US September 2004 Page 46 ControlMatrix User s Guide ControlMatrix Console MediaMatrix 22 Device Type A Host Device Name ghost1 msgnet1 mediamatrix1 ecard cab8015 mcswi 02 Device Name courtesyhost Device Type Host MessageNet Card MediaMatrix Ethernet Card Courtesy Host Other IP Device Other IP Device IP Address 10 21 1 59 MAC Address 10 60 4 201 10 21 1 20 10 21 1 214 10 60 4 123 10 60 4 224 Add Device Remove Devices Device Type Specific Details Host Node No 2 COM Port 1 Display Signs Unused COM Port 2 Figure 5 3 A Host devices Ifan A Host device is specified enter the QNX node number of the host The A Host also has two serial ports in its default configuration COM port 1 and COM port 2 Define the role of these ports using the drop down list boxes provided on the pane on the right side of the dialog box below the Host Node No text box msgnet1 mediamatrix1 ecard cab8015 mcswi tch02 courtesyhost Ethernet Card Courtesy Host Other IP Device Other IP Device Device Type MessageNet Card Device Name msgnet1 Device Name Device Type IP Address MAC Address ghost1 Q Host Ad De De ahost1 Host 10 60 4 201 10221 21 20 10 21 1 214 10 60 4 123 10 60 4 224 Device Type Specific Deta
205. itor keyboard and mouse if not already installed and reboot Watch the monitor for any error messages Rectify any failures reported Try pressing Esc on the keyboard at the point in the boot sequence when it says Hit Esc for alternate OS This will boot to a login prompt and allow some level of debugging for experienced technicians It will also ensure that the machine has achieved a state that will allow remote access by technical support providers if a modem has been connected for this purpose Once the host has been restored to a state where it will boot you may need to reinstall software from the installation CD This will generally require re configuration of the ControlMatrix installation or reinstatement of the most recent backup 10 3 1 2 It boots but makes no network connections a b d Make sure the network switch or switches used for the ControlNet network and CobraNet network are powered up and functional Check the interconnecting cables from the Q Host network ports to the switch Look for an indication of network activity both on the host network ports and the switch Confirm that the IP address selected for the Q Host is part of the ControlNet Subnet Also confirm that the IP address selected for the CobraNet network device is part of the CobraNet Subnet Use the Ping utility see Section 10 1 2 to check that both ports on the Q Host are accessible from the appropriate network Subnet 10 3 1 3 It boots but th
206. itted with a key operated security switch the Ptt button will not function unless the key is turned fully clockwise V4 0US September 2004 Page 151 MediaMatrix lt p ControlMatrix User s Guide Using Devices 9 4 2 3 Selection Buttons In the center of the panel is a group of four Selection buttons Each button represents a page code selection To choose a page code press the button for that code An indicator in the top right corner of the button will illuminate to confirm the selection Page codes are assigned to particular buttons on each PCUI ControlMatrix Console see Section 6 2 1 Operation of the selection buttons is mutually exclusive only one can be selected at a time 9 4 2 4 Power No Network Indicator At the top of the panel to the right of center is a Power Network indicator For the PCU1 to operate correctly this must be lit continuously If it is off the unit is not powered and if it is flashing it is not communicating with the Q Host or has not been correctly configured in the Q Host In this state the PCU will not respond to button presses Ensure that the indicator is lit continuously prior to using the PCUI V4 0US September 2004 Page 152 MediaMatrix 22 ControlMatrix User s Guide Using Devices 9 5 Using a PCU2 Paging Station 9 5 1 Description The PCU2 is a paging station that permits an operator to initiate paging events involving one of 999 page codes At the PCU2 an operator can select a pa
207. ix Setup b Make sure the device has a valid address set on its DIP switches c Check the power supply to the device and that the power indicator is on and not flashing The audio doesn t change level when I press the volume up down buttons a Check the power supply to the device and that the power indicator is on and not flashing b Otherwise the unit has a hardware fault and should be serviced 10 3 8 4 I have a problem with an SVC2 Doesn t go to full volume during a page a Make sure the SVC2 has been assigned to the correct zone using the Zone Attributes dialog in ControlMatrix Setup b Make sure the device has a valid address set on its DIP switches c Check the power supply to the device and that the power network indicator is on and not flashing The audio doesn t change level when I press the volume up down buttons a Check the power supply to the device and that the power indicator is on and not flashing b Otherwise the unit has a hardware fault and should be serviced I can t select a background a Make sure that the wallplate backgrounds have been correctly configured using the Background Allocation dialog in ControlMatrix Console V4 0US September 2004 Page 185 MediaMatrix lt p ControlMatrix User s Guide Debugging b Monitor the background sources using the signal probe in the MediaMatrix View File Make sure they are all present and correctly patched Then monitor the background outputs for the zo
208. ix Setup f If nothing can be heard or only some speakers are working check the outputs of the media matrix CAB or BOBs and the amplifiers they are feeding for correct operation I can t select a background a See steps to d of Section 10 3 8 5 I can t change the level of the background b Make sure that the wallplate backgrounds have been correctly configured using the Background Allocation dialog in ControlMatrix Console c Monitor the background sources using the signal probe in the MediaMatrix View File Make sure they are all present and correctly patched Trace the background audio through to the zone output d Otherwise the unit has a hardware fault and should be serviced I can t select my local input a See steps to d of Section 10 3 8 5 I can t change the level of the background b Make sure the SCP has a local input assigned to it using the System Input Configuration dialog in ControlMatrix Setup c Use the signal probe in the MediaMatrix View File to monitor the local input source Trace the audio path through to the output for the zone in question d Check signal source and the audio cabling to the local input plate e Otherwise the unit has a hardware fault and should be serviced V4 0US September 2004 Page 186 MediaMatrix 22 ControlMatrix User s Guide Debugging I don t get the background I expect a Make sure that the wallplate backgrounds have been correctly configured usi
209. ix User s Guide ControlMatrix Console Device Type Ethernet Card Device Name ecard Device Name ghost1 ahost1 msgnet1 mediamatrix1 courtesyhost cab8015 mcswi 02 Device Type IP Address Q Host 832121558 amp Host MessageNet Card 10 60 4 201 MediaMatrix 10 21 1 20 Ethernet Card Courtesy Host 10 21 1 214 Other Device 10 60 4 123 Other IP Device 10 60 4 224 MAC Address Add Device Remove Devices Device Type Specific Details MediaMatrix 22 Host Name Logical Network ID qhosti 4 Figure 5 6 Ethernet Card devices If the device is a 4xSerial card specify the host into which the card will be installed using the drop down list labeled Host Name Then define the role for each of the four serial ports using the drop down list boxes provided on the pane on the right side of the dialog box below the host name Device Type 4 Card Device Name sercard4 Device Name ghost1 ahost1 msgnet1 mediamatrix1 ecard courtesyhost cab8015 ch 2 Device Type IP Address Q Host 10 21 1 59 amp Host MessageNet Card 50 4 201 MediaMatrix celer Ethernet Card Courtesy Host 721242 Other Device 50 4 Other IP Device 50 4 xSerial Card MAC Address Add Device Remove Devices Device Type Specific Details Host Name Port Allocation COM Port 1 COM Port 2 COM Port 3
210. ix hosts are created as node 1 To deploy a host into a multi node system the node number needs to be changed described later in this chapter When planning and configuring a system it is necessary to know which physical box is going to be which node number For the remainder of this document this number 1 7 will be referenced as the QNX node number How many networks Every ControlMatrix installation will contain a minimum of two logical networks These may be implemented either on a single set of network switches and separated using VLANS or on separate network hardware A single large switch with VLAN support is most common Each logical network is assigned a Logical Network Number The first network is always the Control Network This is the network that all Q Hosts A Hosts and MediaMatrix frames use to communicate control information The Control Network 1s always Logical Network Number 1 The second network is the first CobraNet network In a ControlMatrix system all audio is carried on CobraNet networks Most installations will have only one CobraNet network although large installations with very complex audio routing requirements may have up to four CobraNet networks In addition to audio the CobraNet network s carry CA485 data for PCU and wall mounted control devices between CABs and the Q Host s The first CobraNet network is Logical Network Number 2 Additional CobraNet networks use Logical Network Numbers 3 5 Most s
211. ke this option it starts software processes running on the Q Host It may also be advantageous to deselect the box in the bottom left corner that says Use Wizard Mode next time unless you intend to use the Wizard next time you run ControlMatrix Setup 4 1 9 Are ControlMatrix and MediaMatrix Working Together Check that the configuration of the Q Host and the View File match once the servers are running This check can be confirmed by ensuring that the names of items such as Background sources have transferred correctly to appropriate devices in the View File If the names do not appear it is likely that the MediaMatrix and Q Host are not talking correctly via the ControlNet network see Section 4 1 12 Troubleshooting ControlNet Network Problems Once the system is generally up and running start ControlMatrix Console by clicking on the MediaMatrix Computer Icon on the ControlMatrix desktop Console is used to configure day to day settings for paging stations background assignments levels etc See Chapter 6 for in depth information about ControlMatrix Console On a first pass through Console it is highly likely that missing items will be discovered and configuration errors identified These can be corrected by iterating through the Getting Started process If necessary return to ControlMatrix Setup in Standard mode to correct any set up errors Restart the system servers each time you run Setup Note that changes made using Con
212. l a directory named will appear in the Remote Source Folder file list box Use the Disconnect button to remove the cd folder when it is no longer required To gain access to a FAT formatted floppy disk in the Q Host s floppy drive click the New button At the top of the Mount Remote Folders dialog click the Connect to Floppy Drive button Make sure the floppy disk is in the floppy drive then click the Done button If successful a directory named floppy will appear in the Remote Source Folder file list box Use the Disconnect button to remove the floppy folder when it is no longer required Connect to Remote host m Floppy Drive CD Drive Enter Computer NetBIOS Name of Remote PC pc 212 Enter IP Address or Host Name of Remote PC 10 21 ede Enter the name of the shared folder on the Remote PC Pct 2 Share Figure 6 22 Mounting remote file systems CDs and floppy disks 6 5 2 Text Association Pane A block of text can be associated with a WAV file stored on the Q Host s hard drive This association is for the purpose of displaying appropriate text on display signs as the recorded announcement is played out to the paging system The text association is achieved using the Message Manager s Text Association pane The pane lists all the WAV files in the cm waves directory and its sub directories It also displays any text that has already been associated with these files V4 0US September 2004
213. l have been done for you by the installer program Within MediaMatrix RATC must be enabled Maximize the MediaMatrix application Select Tools Options Remote Services and enable RATC using the default port If a MediaMatrix View File has already been designed it is now time to load it If a View File has not yet been designed see Section 4 2 Making a MediaMatrix View File Once the View File is loaded compile and run it 4 1 7 Running and Testing the View File With the View File running ensure that e the CAB Addresses Hardware ID are set up This is the information that was gathered from the switch positions on the front of the CABs e bundles are assigned to all of the CobraNet I O devices and CABs Some restrictions apply to the choice of bundle numbers For assistance see http www peakaudio com CobraNet papers Bundle Assignments html e there is a link between MediaMatrix and CABs green link indicator in the View File the bundles are being transmitted and received red transmitting indicators and green receiving indicators in the View File At this stage check that audio is being received in the MediaMatrix via CABi units Set up a probe device with a meter in the View File and probe the various inputs Background sources can be activated for this purpose Similarly with the aid of an assistant confirm that PCU audio 18 arriving at the MediaMatrix via the correct CAB inputs one person presses Ptt on a PCU a
214. last week this month and last month The Files menu contains items for recovery of the system configuration from any one of these archived copies For example To restore last week s archived copy of the system configuration select the Restore last week s item in the Files menu A prompt will appear asking for confirmation of the restoration Click the Proceed button to continue with the configuration restoration Click the Abort button to cancel the process V4 0US September 2004 Page 73 MediaMatrix 22 ControlMatrix User s Guide ControlMatrix Console 5 14 System Menu 5 141 Generate System Files Whenever changes are made to the configuration of the ControlNet system it is necessary to regenerate the system files This can be initiated manually using the Generate System Files menu item 5 14 2 Start Servers This menu item will manually start the ControINet servers The ControlNet servers are the software processes running on the Q Host to implement the system facilities The servers will start automatically each time the Q Host is booted 5 14 3 Terminate Servers To terminate the ControlNet servers select this item from the System menu 5 144 Restart System From time to time it may be necessary to restart the Q Host warm reboot To restart the Q Host select the Restart system item from the System menu 5 14 5 Shutdown System If it is necessary to remove power to a Q Host to relocate or service it it is wise to
215. le Lt Terminal page Lj Enable Messages Delayed release amp PCU1 Gate Lounge 17 PCUS Info Counter Enter the text to be displayed during a page 1 85 PCUS Gate Lounge 42 Would all passengers please proceed to the Arrivals Hall oo Keypad Paging Stations Global Codes Gate lounges f Terminal page 6 Baggage Message Specify text colour Specify text display mode Golden Wing i f PCU Main Concourse Scrolling i f PCU2 Check In Desk gt at 0 TPU at 1 Clear page code Page Timeout 120 secs Figure 6 4 Enable text display while paging from a PCU For live pages the Text Attributes pane provides a mechanism for specifying the text to be displayed during the page Recorded announcements use the text associated with WAV files using the Message Manager To specify the text displayed during a live page enter the text into the text box provided on the Text Attributes pane The Text Attributes pane also allows the user to choose whether the text should appear as fixed or scrolling on the displays The color of the text can also be specified Select from red green or amber To display scrolling text on the display signs click the Scrolling button on the Text Attributes pane For fixed text click the Fixed button To display the text using red characters click the red button below the Specify text color label For green text click
216. lected for removal all channels belonging to that device will be removed For example it is not possible to remove just one channel out of four for a TPUA To save changes made to the telephone paging units click the Done button 5 8 System Inputs Configuration Dialog The System Inputs Configuration dialog is used to define the audio inputs to the ControlMatrix system All audio inputs to the system arrive at the MediaMatrix DAB digital audio bus where they can be distributed to system outputs or paging zones This dialog Figure 5 13 is used to give each system input DAB channel a meaningful label The input is then categorized by type Note that DAB channels are numbered consecutively from 101 onwards A ControlMatrix system input can be one of five types PCU Background User SCP Local and Telephone PCU Telephone and SCP local inputs need to be connected to physical devices to complete their configuration PCU and SCP devices are defined using the CA485 Device Manager The Telephone Paging Unit Manager is used to add and configure the telephone units Changes to the System Inputs Configuration dialog are saved after editing when the Done button is clicked to exit V4 0US September 2004 Page 56 ControlMatrix User s Guide ControlMatrix Console CD Player Background Radio 4KG Background Radio Background MP3 Jukebox Background Main Concourse PCU PCU PCU2 Main Concourse Information Counter PCU PCU PCUS Info Cou
217. log 5560 Card See MessageNet card Schedule Preview Dialog that permits scheduled events for a particular day to be previewed Schedule A mechanism that allows various events to be ordered in a sequence and released Scheduler at specified dates times according to a calendar clock SCP Local Input See Local SCP SCP A wall mounted control device used adjacent to speakers in a zone to adjust sound level and select a background source or local user input Level adjustment and selection executed remotely by MediaMatrix Communications with the rest of the ControlMatrix system is by CA485 Sequence One or more messages replayed one after another in a specified order Sequence of See Sequence Messages Servers Software processes that implement the system facilities running on the Q Host Source The origin of a background program e g a CD player background Standard Mode Refers to ControlMatrix Setup A mode of operation that provides a menu driven interface and fast random access to any or all of the configuration dialogs V4 0US September 2004 Page 232 ControlMatrix User s Guide Glossary MediaMatrix 22 Start Servers Start the servers running on the Q Host see Servers Store and forward A live announcement is recorded by the system store and replayed to the required destination zones s forward when they are available Automatically used by the system to deal with live announcements to destin
218. ls to reveal the new entries User Inputs Audio inputs to a ControlMatrix system that may be freely assigned to zones for input of user generated program VLAN A Virtual Local Area Network usually created by partitioning Ethernet switches into one or more separate LANs Wallplate A wall mounted controlling device intended for use within a Paging Zone See also SVC1 SVC2 and SCP May also refer to a PCP2 connector plate used for terminating the flexible cable tail of a PCUI or PCU2 Wallplate A Background source assigned for use by specific wallplate devices SVC2 or Background SCP V4 0US September 2004 Page 233 MediaMatrix 22 ControlMatrix User s Guide Glossary Wave Recorder A virtual device used within ControlMatrix to record messages Wizard Wizard Mode Refers to ControlMatrix Setup A mode of operation that presents the configuration dialog boxes in a logical step by step sequence It also provides helpful prompts at each stage to direct the configuration process Zone See Paging Zone Zone Attributes Attributes of a Paging Zone including a label a zone type zone number etc Zone Label A descriptive name given to a Paging Zone Zone Processor A MediaMatrix View File device that the Q Host controls to generate audio for a single zone SVC2 zone processors are special in that they provide four background outputs per zone In other respects all zone processors provide identical features
219. mber required For node 2 the file will be changed as shown below boot sys boot boot sys boot so SO boot sys Proc32 boot sys Proc32 1 2 boot sys S1ib32 boot sys S1ib32 Wc E boot sys Slibl6 boot sys Slibl6 Tc UY bin Fsys bin Fsys ux bin Fsys eide bin Fsys eide fsys Ndsk0 0 0 5 0 eide 1 0 114 Rx ome bin mount bin mount p dev hd0 0 dev hd0 0t77 xr bin sinit bin sinit TERM qnxm When the required changes have been made press lt ALT X gt and choose Save to save the file and quit the editor Building the new boot image The above file 15 a list of instructions to the tools that create the boot image The image must now be created Execute the command buildqnx v boot build install n boot images install n The screen will now display some information and will create the image file boot images install n The newly created boot image file must then be made the active one The following sequence of commands creates a backup of the old boot image and then makes the new boot image active take careful note of the syntax especially where to use and where not to use a leading full stop V4 0US September 2004 Page 212 MediaMatrix 22 ControlMatrix User s Guide Advanced Topics Execute this command cp boot altboot cp boot images install n boot Repeat for all nodes The above process of modifying t
220. means to allow the user to identify the purpose of the entry It is just as editable as any other data in the event Until you click on the New button or on another pre existing event in the left side list the previously edited event remains in the editor and any changes including the name are made to that event 09 My 5485 network is bigger than 16 PCUs and I have several PCU 2100 supplies to power them that I am running in linked mode Can I link all the RS485 CAB ports onto the one RS485 port 9 There is no physical reason to stop you doing this but it not the best way to connect them from the point of view of fault tolerance A PCU 2100 powers a maximum of 16 PCUs and this is V4 0US September 2004 Page 194 MediaMatrix lt p ControlMatrix User s Guide FAQs the same number as inputs on the CAB16i hence if the CAB fails or looses connection to the Media Matrix only the 16 devices associated with it stop working If multiple PCU 2100s are fed from the same CAB by looping the control ports much more of the network will be dependant upon the reliability of a single CAB If CAB8i units are used it is actually safer to run the PCU 2100s in independent mode with each bank connected only to its associated CAB8i than using linked mode with only one CAB providing the RS485 support 11 2 2 Recorded Message Events What s producing the random indents in the Sequence of Messages window Al The entries in the wind
221. n Select Remote Source Folder Select Local Destination Folder 212 Share waves fat 5 PreambleBells wav Jul 221513 Catts Jun 06 08 42 D Oct 15 10 14 O Pause 1 seconds wav Feb 11 09 02 alarmbells way Oct 15 10 14 Pause 10 seconds wav Feb 11 09 01 alarmtest Oct 15 10 14 3 Pause 2 seconds wav Feb 11 03 02 3 baggage way Oct 15 10 10 Pause 5 seconds wav Feb 11 08 01 baggagebelt wav Oct 15 10 15 airstafiwav Oct 15 10 12 cimonitors wav Oct 15 10 15 alarmbells way Oct 15 10 12 courtesy way Oct 15 10 10 alarmtest wav Oct 15 10 12 3 emergency wav Oct 15 10 15 baggage way Oct 15 10 08 3 evacuate wav Oct 15 10 15 baggagebelt wav Oct 15 10 13 D fire wav Oct 15 10 15 cimonitors wav Oct 15 10 13 Oct 15 10 15 3 courtesy way Oct 15 10 08 DB flightinfo wav Oct 15 10 15 O emergency wav Oct 15 10 12 parking wav Jan 22 08 27 D evacuate wav Oct 15 10 13 D preamble bells wav Oct 16 22 43 QO flightinfo wav Oct 15 10 13 19 23 40 security way Oct 15 10 07 D ra2 way May 19 2340 smoking wav Oct 15 10 07 ra3 wav May 19 23 40 D red wav May 18 23 40 security wav Oct 15 10 09 New Disconnect x New Figure 6 21 WAV manager dialog To mount access a shared directory on a remote host click the New but
222. n from both manual power up and at restart after a power failure the MediaMatrix must auto login start MWare and load and compile the necessary View File Making these set ups is covered in the standard MWare help It is preferable to turn off the automatic hardware check of the DPU hardware at startup 4 3 MediaMatrix requirements for ControlMatrix 4 3 1 MediaMatrix Card Complement and Placement ControlMatrix requires at least one CobraNet DPU DSP card MwWare requires that if a MediaMatrix frame has one CobraNet DPU card it must have the lowest base address lowest DIP switch setting see MediaMatrix documentation For MediaMatrix frames with several CobraNet V4 0US September 2004 Page 37 MediaMatrix lt p ControlMatrix User s Guide Getting Started DPU cards the card with the lowest base address is usually but not always factory installed furthest away from the power supply Additional cards can be of any type as required for the application although CobraNet cards will give the greatest amount of system flexibility There is no restriction on card placement but it is usual to group cards of like type together 4 3 2 CAB firmware versions required for ControlMatrix MediaMatrix CABs have two types of firmware Control and CobraNet For use with ControlMatrix CAB Control firmware must be V1 5 or later In general the latest available firmware is recommended v1 5 has been factory tested and approved earlier versions
223. n ControlMatrix Setup d For recorded announcement events make sure at least one S560 MessageNet card is on line e Monitor the destination paging zones for the event to make sure audio is leaving the MediaMatrix f Check the time and date on the Q Host to make sure it is correct 10 3 7 7 None of the scheduled events are working See the Section 10 3 5 I get no scheduled activity V4 0US September 2004 Page 183 MediaMatrix 22 ControlMatrix User s Guide Debugging 10 3 7 8 I can t find any controls for playing recorded announcements The Q Host must have a valid MessageNet license and the MessageNet package must be installed before recorded announcements can be used in the system Use ControlMatrix Setup to add new licenses or 5560 MessageNet cards 10 3 7 9 I can t find the control for playing a preamble before an announcement The Q Host must have a valid MessageNet license and the MessageNet package must be installed before the preamble can be played Use ControlMatrix Setup to add new licenses and S560 MessageNet cards 10 3 7 10 Ihave an active alarm The System Alarms dialog is used to signal and display system faults that have been detected by the Q Host The System Alarms dialog is accessible from the Diagnostics menu in ControlMatrix Console This dialog can be made to pop up when new alarm conditions are detected The Global Alarms tab displays all the current system faults Ideally the list should be emp
224. n has been made click the Duplicate button under the event list A copy of the selected event will appear in the event list and can then be modified in the usual manner Disabling an event To disable a particular event select the event from the list Use the Enable Disable button on the configuration pane under the Event Label and set the button to the disabled state This will prevent the event from being triggered while the button is in the Disabled state Disabling the Scheduler The system event scheduler can be disabled from the Scheduler Configuration page V4 0US September 2004 Page 96 MediaMatrix lt p ControlMatrix User s Guide ControlMatrix Console Click the button provided below the event list pane When the button label reads Enabled and the indicator is bright green the scheduler is enabled and scheduled events will be executed When the button label reads Disabled and the indicator is red the scheduler is disabled and scheduled events will be ignored Events being executed at the time the Scheduler is disabled will proceed without interruption Event Timing The Timing tab is used to define when and how often a particular event will be triggered The procedure for entering timing parameters is essentially the same for each type of event To trigger an event only once on a given day change the drop down list box so the first line reads The event will trigger once only For Recorded Message events To play back
225. ncourse PCU PCU PCU2 Main Concourse Information Counter PCU PCUS Info Counter Gate Lounge 42 PCU PCU PCU3 Gate Lounge 42 Gate Lounge 13 PCU PCU1 Gate Lounge 13 Gate Lounge 17 PCU PCU PCU1 Gate Lounge 17 Check In Desk PCU PCU PCU2 Check In Desk Telephone paging input Telephone TPU at 1 Western Bar Input SCP Local SCP Western Bar Banquet Hall Input SCP Local SCP Banquet Hall Room 23 North corner User Room 25 West end User Room 23 South corner User Unused Unused Edit SCP Devices Figure 5 15 Adding SCP devices To add a new SCP device to the system click the Edit SCP Devices button This will open the CA485 Device Manager New SCP devices will appear in the SCP drop down list on the Input Device Details pane once the CA485 Device Manager has been closed To connect an SCP device to a system input select the system input from the list on the left side of the dialog and then select the corresponding SCP from the drop down list Current assignments are displayed in the Device column in the system inputs list An SCP local system input must be connected to only one SCP 5 8 5 Telephone Inputs Telephone inputs accept audio from external Telephone Paging Units Once an input has been categorized as Telephone type the Input Device Details pane for TPUs becomes visible The pane lists all available TPU devices in the system and is used to connect a TPU to a ControlMatrix
226. nd speaks while another monitors audio both at the CAB meter and using the probe in the View File Note that a PCU will open its audio path when the Ptt button is pressed irrespective of whether or not it is logged on to the system via the RS485 network 4 1 8 Configure the Q Host Next configure the Q Host for operation with your system In the QNX Photon Login dialog box see Section 4 1 5 enter the administrator user and password It is Userid Administrator enter Password administrator enter Note that these are case sensitive A window will now appear with among other things a set of six icons in the bottom center of the screen Select the MediaMatrix Computer Icon with the S in the center This will start ControlMatrix Setup For an initial set up the usual way to run ControlMatrix Setup is in Wizard Mode see Chapter 5 Setup allows the user to specify all of the system inputs Backgrounds Paging Stations are the usual starting set with possible User Inputs as well In addition Setup specifies the outputs by naming the paging zones Setup will also require the RS485 addresses of wall plate devices and PCUs V4 0US September 2004 Page 33 MediaMatrix 22 ControlMatrix User s Guide Getting Started Advance through the Wizard step by step using the prompts and help as required and referring to Chapter 5 if more information is needed At the end of the Wizard there is an option to start the servers Ta
227. ne in question in the View File c Check all operation of the power amplifiers that feed the various background sources there will be one channel for each background source used up to 4 d Check the audio cabling to the SVC2 device e Otherwise the unit has a hardware fault and should be returned for service I don t get the background source I expect a Make sure that the wallplate backgrounds have been correctly configured using the Background Allocation dialog in ControlMatrix Console b Monitor the background sources using the signal probe in the MediaMatrix View File Make sure they are all present and correctly patched Then monitor the background outputs for the zone in question in the View File c Check the audio cabling to the SVC2 device 10 3 8 5 I have a problem with an SCP I can t change the level of the background a Check the power supply to the device and that the power indicator is on and steady b Check that the wallplate has been added to the list of devices in the Device Manager dialog box in ControlMatrix Setup c Make sure the SCP has been assigned to the correct zone using the Zone Attributes dialog in ControlMatrix Setup d Using the ControlMatrix Console System Alarms panel check that RATC comms GOOD appears under the Hardware tab If not then see Section 10 3 2 1 The Q Host can t connect to the MediaMatrix e Make sure you have started the ControlMatrix servers in ControlMatr
228. ng Started address set This is done on switches behind a cover plate on the CAB front panel see CAB documentation and also Chapter 8 of this manual for more information on CAB address setting Knowledge of each CAB address is required when configuring the system 4 1 4 1 Install Paging Stations Paging Stations PCUs are installed at locations where operators make live announcements or release recorded messages PCUs may be wall mounted cabled directly via wall cavity or desk mounted flexible cable tail to wall plate connector Each PCU requires audio and RS485 connections to a local CAB plus low voltage DC power supplied from a centralized PCU 2100 see Chapter 8 for additional information about power and RS485 connections As PCUs are installed their RS485 addresses should be recorded for later use When shipped from the factory PCU addresses are set to the last two digits of the serial number Addresses be freely reset see Chapter 8 4 1 4 2 Install Telephone Paging Units Telephone Paging Units TPUs are usually co located with the central equipment A standard PSTN Public Switched Telephone Network line is required for each TPU channel Telephone connection is via an RJ11 connector TPUs are powered from the mains via an in line power supply Each TPU channel requires an audio input connection from a CABo as well as an audio output connection to a local CABi TPU units are controlled via dedicated RS232 ports on a Q
229. ng the Background Allocation dialog in ControlMatrix Console b Monitor the background sources using the signal probe in the MediaMatrix View File Make sure they are all present and correctly patched Then monitor the background output for the zone in question in the View File The wall mounted controller has power but responds incorrectly to button presses See steps a to d of Section 10 3 8 5 Lcan t change the level of the background 10 3 9 I have a problem with a PCU 10 3 9 1 network LED is flashing PCU is offline This means the PCU is not able to detect the presence of a CA485 network The device is offline See the Section 10 3 7 10 A CA485 device is offline 10 3 9 2 I press the press to talk button nothing happens a Follow steps a and b in the Section 10 3 9 6 I can t select a page code The buttons don t work b For PCUS fitted with key switches make sure the key is in the enabled position c Check the configuration of the PCU using the Paging Station Configuration dialog in ControlMatrix Console 10 3 9 3 I press the press to talk button it changes color to amber and nothing more This is normal operation for the PCU page codes or buttons that cause a recorded message to be played Otherwise try the following a The destination zones for the page may be busy b Check the configuration of the PCU using the Paging Station Configuration dialog in ControlMatrix Console and make sure the pag
230. nstalled for this mode V4 0US September 2004 Page 143 MediaMatrix 22 ControlMatrix User s Guide Installation Reference The Independent mode of operation is used when each PCU 2100 RS485 bank is intended to be driven from its own MediaMatrix CAB The cabling topology shown in Figure 8 6 creates two distinct RS485 networks Loop to signal Independant Operation PCU2100 MMCab1 Network 1 Control Panel Net 1 Daisy Chain 1 RS485 Control Panel Net 1 Daisy Chain 2 Network 1 PCU 1 MM Cab 2 Network 2 Network 1 PCU 2 Control Panel Network 2 PCU 1 Net 2 Daisy Chain 1 Control Panel Net 2 Daisy Chain 2 Figure 8 6 Independent mode RS485 cabling for the PCU 2100 Network 2 PCU 4 To operate in redundant mode it is necessary to wire the Bank and RS485 ports in parallel Figure 8 7 demonstrates a possible cabling configuration PCU2100 2 Loop to signal Redundant Operation PCU2 Control Panel Daisy Chain Figure 8 7 Redundant mode RS485 cabling for the PCU 2100 V4 0US September 2004 Page 144 MediaMatrix lt p ControlMatrix User s Guide Installation Reference V4 0US September 2004 Page 145 MediaMatrix ve 9 Using ControlMatrix Devices MediaMatrix 22 ControlMatrix User s Guide Using Devices 9 1 Using an 5 Volume Control 9 1 1 Description SVCIs and SVC1 20s are wall mounted devices that c
231. nter Gate Lounge 42 PCU PCU PCUS Gate Lounge 42 Gate Lounge 13 PCU PCU PCU1 Gate Lounge 13 Gate Lounge 17 PCU PCU PCU1 Gate Lounge 17 Check In Desk PCU PCU PCU2 Check In Desk Telephone paging input Telephone TPU at 1 Western Bar Input SCP Local SCP Western Bar Banquet Hall Input SCP Local SCP Banquet Hall Room 23 North corner User Room 25 West end User Room 23 South corner User Unused Unused Figure 5 13 Input configuration To change the label for an input select it in the input list then type the new label into the Edit Input Label text box To change the type of a particular input select it in the input list and then choose the desired input type from the drop down list It is possible to select multiple system inputs and change them all simultaneously to the same type 5 8 1 PCU Inputs PCU inputs accept audio from Paging Control Units PCU in the field Once an input has been categorized as a PCU type the Input Device Details pane for PCUs will become visible This pane Figure 5 14 is used to connect a PCU device to a ControlMatrix system input The pane lists all available PCU devices in the system in a drop down list box V4 0US September 2004 Page 57 MediaMatrix 22 ControlMatrix User s Guide ControlMatrix Console Select input type Edit input label Mp Device KJ Information Counter PCU Select PCU paging station PCUS Info Counter CD Player Background Radio 4KQ Background Select adjacent SVC
232. nting the four buttons on the station Keypad Paging Stations PCU2 4 and 5 are grouped in another branch along with the Global page code definitions available to keypad stations Global page codes appear as sub branches under the Global Codes branch Only fully configured global codes appear in this branch Each PCU2 PCUA or PCUS is assigned a subset of page codes from the global set For the particular paging station these are known as Active Codes The right pane is used to display and configure the attributes of specific page buttons or global codes selected on the left side of the dialog box In the case of keypad paging stations this pane is used to allocate page codes from the set of global codes to a particular paging station Navigating and Allocating Page Codes To configure a page code for a four button paging station button select the required button sub branch under the paging station branch Alternatively select the paging station branch and use the Button Number selection controls in the right pane Once the desired button has been selected use the configuration pane on the right to set up the attributes of the page code see below To create a global page code for use by keypad paging stations select the desired page code using the Page Code selection controls in the right pane Use either the up and down buttons or type the code into the text box Once the desired code has been selected use the configuration pan
233. nts where a message is recorded and released after a delay giving V4 0US September 2004 Page 161 MediaMatrix lt p ControlMatrix User s Guide Using Devices the operator an option to cancel the delayed announcement for an expanded description of this function see Section 9 7 2 4 Cancel If the PCU4 page code selection is for a recorded message playback rather than a live page the Ptt switch is used to start the message Again the switch is pressed and held The amber Wait indicator will illuminate when the button is pressed While the button is held there will be one of two outcomes a The amber Wait indicator will extinguish and the green Go indicator will begin to flash If this occurs the message replay request has been accepted and the LCD will display Req Queued see Section 9 7 2 4 The message will then be placed in a queue and will be played as soon as all zones for which it is destined are available As soon as the green indicator flashes the operator can release the Ptt switch and the indicator will extinguish OR b The amber Wait indicator extinguishes and the green Go indicator does not illuminate If this occurs the message request has failed The LCD will display Req Failed see Section 9 7 2 4 operator should release the Ptt switch and investigate the reason for failure Note that the Microphone Ptt switch will operate with the microphone stored in the retaining clip
234. nused Alarm Ack Alarm Acknowledge Figure 5 20 Configuring external inputs The Alarm Manager s External Inputs tab is used to display and configure external inputs To specify the type of an external input select the appropriate item in the list of external inputs and then from the Input Type drop down list box select the desired type It is possible to select multiple inputs and to change them all to the same type simultaneously To disable an external input choose the Unused option from the Input Type drop down list box To change the label for a particular external input select it from the list of inputs then type the new label into the Edit Label text box V4 0US September 2004 Page 65 ControlMatrix User s Guide ControlMatrix Console Summary Alarm Summary Alarm New Alarm New Alarm Unused Unused Unused Unused Unused Unused Unused Unused Unused Unused Alternate host is dead Host Failure Figure 5 21 Configuring external outputs The Alarm Manager s External Outputs tab is used to display and configure external outputs To specify the type of an external output select the appropriate item in the list of external outputs and then from the Output Type drop down list box select the desired type It is possible to select multiple outputs and to change them all to the same type simultaneously To disable an external output choose the Unused option from the Output Type drop down list box
235. o 000000 OO Background Source n MediaMatrix with CobraNet DSP 5 2 2 3 m gt 5 a 2 5 Q Host z 2 i 2 5 Paging S Stations as 8 8 required o o A Host 1 NOTE power distribution to Paging Stations ER and Wallplates not shown 8 o A Host 2 Wall Plates as required V4 0US September 2004 000000 00 8 160 Paging Zones as required 000000 00 8 160 Figure 1 1 The structure of a basic ControlMatrix system Remote Control PC s Page 10 MediaMatrix 22 ControlMatrix User s Guide Overview 1 3 Central Equipment In a ControlMatrix system there are three main central equipment building blocks the MediaMatrix the Q Host and the A Host e The MediaMatrix routes and processes audio as required for the system The Q Host manages paging processes controlling the MediaMatrix RATC For systems with low to medium messaging requirements the Q Host also manages message storage and replay An A Host manages message storage and replay in systems with more complex requirements It uses 48KHz 16bit mono wave WAV files ControlMatrix systems include a MediaMatrix and a Q Host One or more A Hosts may be added depending on the complexity of the messaging sys
236. o as to optimize wiring infrastructure 1 4 4 Networks Several different networks are required within a ControlMatrix system 485 networks required for field device communications typically between wall controllers paging stations and CABs A CobraNet network is required for audio and control between the MediaMatrix and CABs CobraNet is based on the industry standard 100Base T Ethernet physical layer Finally a separate control network called the ControlNet network is required for communication between the MediaMatrix Q Host and A Hosts Again this is a standard 100Base T Ethernet network It is important to note that the ControlNet network and CobraNet network must be separated While both are 100Base T networks there are fundamental differences in operation between the two Separation can be achieved in several ways using independent Ethernet switches for control and CobraNet or by setting up VLANs virtual LANs within an Ethernet switch 1 5 Where To Go From Here If you re new to ControlMatrix you should read through this entire manual It provides a complete and easy to understand reference for all elements in a typical system The manual includes software guides hardware descriptions and installation procedures V4 0US September 2004 Page 12 MediaMatrix lt p ControlMatrix User s Guide Overview If you need reference information for the user interfaces only try Chapters 5 ControlMatrix Setup r
237. o select days at random hold down the Ctrl key and make selections Active Events Recorded Message Event Event Label Baggage ance 5 Enabled Timing Destination Sequence Text Event is Enabled Background Enabled Assign to Gates Input Disabled The event will repeat every 05 minutes Hours Hours starting at 2 05 41 and finishing at 35 94 1st day a every month 2nd day January day February On the ath day 5th day Bth day 7th day Day of week Day of month v from ne June 2003 until No finish date New Delete Duplicate Today Calendar Mone Calendar Scheduleris Enabled Apply Cancel Done Figure 6 15 Day of the month Events V4 0US September 2004 Page 98 MediaMatrix 22 ControlMatrix User s Guide ControlMatrix Console Finally select the months of the year for which the event will be active Again it is possible to select multiple months or select every month The final step in defining the event timing is to specify the active period or the range of dates over which the event will be active To set the Start Date to today s date click the Today button beneath the starting date text box Alternatively choose a starting date using the calendar control Click the Calendar button to reveal the calendar dialog Select the year then the month before clicking on the day of the mon
238. o use to select backgrounds and adjust level SCPs control zone audio at its source the MediaMatrix zone output therefore all paging speakers attached to the zone will be affected V4 0US September 2004 Page 62 MediaMatrix 22 ControlMatrix User s Guide ControlMatrix Console Select zone type Edit zone label Sign Allocation SCP Allocation SCP x Banquet Hall Source Control Panel Paging Zone mien 5 Western Western Bar Main Concourse sve SCP Banquet Hall Banquet Hall Terminal SVC2 Terminal B Standard Golden Wing Lounge Standard Food court Standard Gate Lounge 14 Standard Gate Lounge 15 Standard Gate Lounge 16 Standard Gate Lounge 17 Standard Gate Lounge 18 Standard Gate Lounge 19 Standard Gate Lounge 20 Standard Gate Lounge 21 Standard Gate Lounge 22 Standard Gate Lounge 23 Standard Gate Lounge 24 Standard Information Desk 5 1 Banquet Hall Western Bar SCP 3 2 Unused Unused Assign to zone Edit device details rj Figure 5 18 Adding SCP zones To add a new SCP device to the system click the Edit device details button This will open the CA485 Device Manager New SCP devices will appear in the SCP assignment pane once the CA485 Device Manager has been closed To assign an SCP device to a paging zone select the paging zone from the list on the left side of the dialog and then select the SCP device from the list on th
239. ode then allocate that page codes to paging stations V4 0US September 2004 Page 80 MediaMatrix 22 ControlMatrix User s Guide ControlMatrix Console Paging Stations Priorit Description utton IT LC MEENEN E Four Button Paging Stations Number Low x Terminal Page Ee PCU1 Gate Lounge 17 Lj Enable Text Play preamble ie Terminal P raam Mesenge pisc 11 Enable Messages Delayed release PCUS Gate Lounge 13 Keypad Paging Stations Available Zones Destination Zones Be Global Codes EF MasterSystem MasterSystem Terminal Gate Lounges EB Main Concourse MasterSystem Terminal B E Loading zone msg z Terminal Concourse Page Terminal 9 Baggage Message Golden Wing Lounge Terminal Page Food Court 1 6 PCUZ Main Concourse Gate Lounge 13 gt PCU2 Information Counter E Gate Lounge 14 E PCUA Check In Desk E Gate Lounge 15 Fe TPUA line 1 Gate Lounge 16 TPUA line 2 Gate Lounge 17 TPU4 line 3 Clear page code Page Timeout 120 secs Figure 6 1 Paging Station Configuration Dialog The Paging Station Configuration dialog is divided into two parts The left side lists all the PCU paging stations defined for the system in a tree structure Four Button Paging Stations PCU1 and PCU3 are grouped together in one branch Each Four Button Paging Station branch has four sub branches represe
240. of entries is now displayed with columns headed Logical Lan and Physical The Logical column is the QNX node number Lan column is the Logical Network Number to which that Ethernet connector is cabled This will usually be 1 for the Control Network and 2 for the CobraNet network If there are multiple CobraNet networks the number will be higher than 2 Physical column is the 12 hex digit MAC address It is necessary to add entries for all of the MAC addresses of the QNX nodes that were recorded above When the information for all nodes has been entered press lt ALT X gt and choose Save to save the file and quit the editor To make sure all is well execute the command netmap f This will cause the system to re read the netmap file just created and also check it for syntax and layout Creation of the netmap file is now complete Licensing A network may only be as large as the number of licenses available to it All nodes on a network need to be aware of all licenses installed on the network in order to define the network scale Until a network 1s configured it is not possible to copy licenses between nodes and it is not possible to configure the network until all nodes have the licenses installed To overcome this chicken and egg situation nodes are shipped with a ten node license If a network larger than ten QNX nodes is required the following process must be undertaken to add additional licenses
241. ole System Alarms panel check that RATC comms GOOD appears under the Hardware tab If not then see Section 10 3 2 1 The Q Host can t connect to the MediaMatrix V4 0US September 2004 Page 190 MediaMatrix 22 ControlMatrix User s Guide Debugging c Make sure the CAB devices used for RS485 distribution are online in the MediaMatrix View File d From the View File check the DynaVar setting for the serial bridging Serial Format and Enable 7 Baudrate 38400 RxMAC Hi 6291712 RxMAC Mid 16722688 RxMAC Lo 34048 The file pa ini in the MWare folder needs to have the following lines added to enable the RS485 to work correctly CobraNet UseDynavar TRUE Restart the MediaMatrix and reload the ControlMatrix View File once changes have been made to pa ini V4 0US September 2004 Page 191 MediaMatrix 20 SS 11 Frequently Asked Questions FAQs MediaMatrix 22 ControlMatrix User s Guide FAQs 11 1 Paging Station Configuration I have gone through the process of defining Global Page Code but after I pressed apply I realized that I have the wrong Page Code number I seem to be able to edit everything in the window have it stick after applying it except the page code box Why can t I change that too Al The Page Code box is the index to the information on the page If you inadvertently set a wrong code or want to rearrange the sequence sometime in the future first you need to create
242. on or location The Licensing Dialog will reject any license that is not intended for the location displayed in the Location text box on the left side of the dialog box The License to and Location text boxes must be filled in before licenses can be added to the system The way this information is entered depends on the method used to enter new licenses There are two methods for entering new licenses The simplest method is to use the ControlMatrix license floppy disk supplied with the system Alternatively the licensee location and license keys may be entered manually Licensed to Enter new license RIDENS Creative Audio Add from floppy Location Description Key ControlMatrix Test System ControlNet module cmcnt 20030001 P5QP ifFs zqGD cUcA I0Q9 200 units MU MessageNet module emnt 20030001 nudQ WaEk fWuj CA47 1Yq0 2 units External Alarms module cmeal 20030001 cYqc OgcG e4Aj Q2Xz 7SF3 1 unit Telephone paging module cmtel 20030001 ycj0 WQ4I fUPB Niv3 Kjf9 4 units Courtesy announcement module cmctc 20030001 FNxR GoWC kXF m83u MPz3 2 units Display sign module cmsin 20030001 Ke8A rTcS Pe2n 3p8K 27a6 10 units Text to Speech Voices cmtts 20030001 X vMr f9WD Qx dz CW9U 5287 4 units Remove Licenses Figure 5 1 ControlMatrix Licensing Dialog To add new licenses from the ControlMatrix license floppy disk first insert the license floppy disk into the floppy disk d
243. on the telephone handset At this point the caller will be asked to either cancel the announcement by typing any key on the keypad or wait to hear the announcement delivered Typing a key will remove the page request from the system and hang up the call If the caller chooses to wait the announcement will be played back down the phone line If the caller hangs up at this point the announcement playback will proceed without further intervention V4 0US September 2004 Page 174 MediaMatrix lt p ControlMatrix User s Guide Using Devices 9 10 23 announcement page codes Selection of a page code that is configured to play a sequence of pre recorded announcements will elicit a voice prompt informing the caller that the sequence has been queued for playback If the caller chooses to wait the sequence of announcements will be played back down the phone line If the caller hangs up at this point the announcement playback will proceed without further intervention V4 0US September 2004 Page 175 MediaMatrix ve 10 Debugging ControlMatrix System MediaMatrix 22 ControlMatrix User s Guide Debugging 10 1 Introduction ControlMatrix provides extensive self diagnosis features to assist with troubleshooting the system in the event of a failure This guide consists of a troubleshooting tree listing some of the most likely system faults Choose the fault outline from the Fault Tree Guide that most closely
244. oned adjacent to a remote device that indicates a fault condition using a relay output or TTL driver The state of remote devices output would be reflected in the System Alarms dialog s V4 0US September 2004 Page 17 MediaMatrix 22 ControlMatrix User s Guide display MediaMatrix view file monitored alarms are configured in ControlMatrix Setup Alarm Manager in much the same way as External Alarms V4 0US September 2004 Page 18 MediaMatrix lt p ControlMatrix User s Guide V4 0US September 2004 Page 19 MediaMatrix 0 E vs 3 Elements of ControlMatrix MediaMatrix 22 ControlMatrix User s Guide ControlMatrix Elements 3 1 Introduction This chapter provides an introduction to the hardware and software elements that combine to form a ControlMatrix system Chapters 5 through 9 describe installation and operation of all of the various elements 32 Central Equipment There are three main elements of the central equipment within a ControlMatrix system Q Host A Host and MediaMatrix 3 2 1 Q Host Q Host 15 a microprocessor based hardware item running dedicated ControlNet software It manages the paging activity and provides graphical user interfaces in the form of ControlMatrix Setup and ControlMatrix Console Processes managed by ControlNet include Paging priority managed on a message by message basis Communication with the MediaMatrix RATC Scheduling of Messages Backgrounds and Inputs Configuration of th
245. ontact 3 Relay Common Contact 5 External Alarm Output 2 Relay Normally Open Contact 4 Relay Normally Closed Contact 6 Relay Common Contact 8 External Alarm Output 3 Relay Normally Open Contact 7 Relay Normally Closed Contact 9 Relay Common Contact 21 External Alarm Output 4 Relay Normally Open Contact 20 Relay Normally Closed Contact 22 External Alarm Output 5 Relay Common Contact 24 Relay Normally Open Contact 23 External Alarm Output 6 Relay Common Contact 26 Relay Normally Open Contact 25 External Alarm Output 7 Relay Common Contact 28 Relay Normally Open Contact 27 External Alarm Output 8 Relay Common Contact 11 Relay Normally Open Contact 10 External Input 1 Switch Input a or 12 Switch Input b or 30 External Input 2 Switch Input a or 13 Switch Input b or 31 External Input 3 Switch Input a or 14 Switch Input b or 32 External Input 4 Switch Input a or 15 Switch Input b or 33 External Input 5 Switch Input a or 16 Switch Input b or 34 External Input 6 Switch Input a or 17 Switch Input b or 35 External Input 7 Switch Input a or 18 Switch Input b or 36 External Input 8 Switch Input a or 19 Switch Input b or 37 Table 8 1 AHC1 Alarm Card Pinouts V4 0US September 2004 Page 140 MediaMatrix lt p ControlMatrix User s Guide Installation Reference 8 3 6 Setting MediaMatrix CAB Addresses MediaMatrix CABs both Input and Output
246. ontrol the volume of one or more speakers directly associated with the unit A typical example is a zone consisting of a number of dressing rooms each room having a speaker and SVC1 control panel SVCIs allow the occupants of each room to individually adjust speaker volume 9 1 2 Operation Control of the speaker volume is accomplished through the use of the up and down buttons on the panel These step the level through six predefined settings ranging from off at the bottom to full level at the top Until the limit is reached each press of the button will immediately increment or decrement the volume by one step If the button is held after a brief period the unit will continue to step automatically A series of six red lights on the left side of the panel show the current speaker volume setting To ensure that paging messages can be heard even if the speaker is turned off the units are connected to a CA485 data network Via this network the volume setting is automatically changed to full level while the page is active The pre page volume setting is automatically restored at the end of the page Volume may be manually adjusted while a page is in process and the adjusted setting will be retained at completion of the page However the SVC1 will go back to full volume at the start of the next page If an SVCI is located in a zone that also contains a paging station and associated with that paging station in ControlMatrix Setup the SVC1 will mute the
247. ontrols are provided for displaying events that play a particular recorded announcement events that allocate a particular background source and events that distribute a particular field input source These controls operate in the same manner as those described in the paragraphs above Click the Done button to close the Schedule Preview dialog V4 0US September 2004 Page 106 MediaMatrix 22 ControlMatrix User s Guide ControlMatrix Console 6 5 Message Manager The Message Manager provides facilities for copying recorded announcement WAV files from a CD a floppy disk or from a remote file system It is responsible for associating text with the WAV files stored on the Q Host s hard drive and it can be used to specify the WAV file used for the preamble for pages of different priorities The Message Manager is divided into three panes that are accessed using tabs labeled e WAV Manager Section 6 5 1 e Text Association Section 6 5 2 e Preamble Selection Section 6 5 3 6 5 1 WAV Manager Pane The WAV Manager Pane is used to copy new WAV files to the Q Host and to organize the files already stored on the Q Hosts hard drive Files may be copied from a CD a floppy disk or from a remote host supporting the NetBIOS protocol a Microsoft Windows PC for example The pane shows the source file list box for the WAV files on the left side The destination file list is displayed on the right side of the pane operations are performe
248. option 9 8 2 Operation A PCUS is a desktop control unit with the following features Microphone Press to talk button and two color Status indicator Keypad LCD Display Power No Network Indicator 32 programmable hot keys These features combine to allow an operator complete control of paging functions 9 8 2 1 Microphone A sensitive noise rejecting goose neck microphone is provided on PCUS front panel for spoken announcements Use the gooseneck to adjust the microphone to a workable position Speak clearly into the microphone at a distance of approximately 2 inches 50mm Speaking more closely may compromise speech intelligibility while speaking further away may reduce paging level and allow the intrusion of background noise If the PCUS is lifted off the desk during announcements grasp the case do not lift the PCU2 by the microphone gooseneck 9 8 2 2 Press to talk Ptt Button Status indicator The Press to talk button is located on the front panel below the keypad In the top right corner of the button is a Status indicator that may illuminate amber or green The primary action required to initiate a paging event from a PCUS is pressing the Ptt button This action either sets up the system V4 0US September 2004 Page 166 MediaMatrix lt p ControlMatrix User s Guide Using Devices for a live page announcement into the microphone or releases a recorded message to the zones associated with the select
249. or most systems this will not be required If it appears that multiple CobraNet networks may be necessary consider whether the system has been fully optimized First organize the MediaMatrix I O capability to create multiple copies of outputs on multiple I O channels This may circumvent the requirement to broadcast Next ensure that all of the channels in a broadcast bundle do indeed need to be broadcast If necessary remove the unicastable ones and make sure the broadcast bundles are optimally filled with channels that are required in multiple places If the above optimization still reveals a need for multiple CobraNet networks it will be necessary to add an additional network for each additional set of four broadcast bundles or part thereof Additional networks may or may not require QNX to access them via a NIC There are two factors that determine the requirement for the NIC on additional CobraNet networks Firstly the additional network s may or may not need to carry CA485 communications The necessity for a particular CobraNet network to carry CA485 data will be determined by the need for CAA85 to be accessible on CABs connected to that network Secondly if an additional network has TCPIP devices connected ControlMatrix can monitor these via the NIC by pinging devices using ICMP If either of these requirements need to be met on a particular additional CobraNet network it will be necessary to provide access from each network to
250. other models apply established RS485 network design techniques Consult your dealer if assistance 1s needed with different wiring models V4 0US September 2004 Page 128 MediaMatrix 22 ControlMatrix User s Guide Installation Reference CAB8 16 PCU2100 Wallplates SCP SVC Bank A CA485 network E E CA485 network Figure 8 1 Recommended RS485 network topology Up to two home run cables allowed per PCU 2100 port For individual large networks where devices are distant from a PCU 2100 the network must be constructed in a daisy chain topology The maximum length of any network the longest path between any two devices including the CAB must be less than 1800 feet 550 meters 8 2 3 Power Distribution All CA485 field devices paging stations wall mounted controllers must be powered by a PCU 2100 For PCU paging stations the power supply is and 15VDC and an independent three conductor cable is mandatory These power cables should be less than 1000 feet 305 meters 16 ga wires are recommended for long cable runs If a shielded cable is used to distribute power to PCUs the drain wire must be used for the 0V connection and the pair for the and supply wires The polarity of the supply to the PCUs is not critical however the 0V must be the center terminal For wall mounted controllers SVC1 SVC1 20 SVC2 and SCP the pow
251. ource of the page live page or recorded message and the second is the destination zone or group of zones to which the source will be directed Note that TPU paging is not available unless the ControlMatrix system has MessageNet capability 9 10 2 Operation 9 10 2 1 Gaining access to the system The first phase of the TPU paging operation is to dial the telephone number allocated for telephone paging at the desired ControlMatrix installation The TPU will answer the call and respond with a voice prompt requesting the caller to provide a four digit P I N using the telephone keypad The P I N entry can commence before the voice prompt finishes If the P I N is not correct the caller will be asked to enter the number again If the P I N is correct the call will proceed and the caller will be asked to enter a three digit page code Code entry can commence before the voice prompt finishes If the page code is not valid the caller will be asked to enter the code again If the code is valid the call will proceed to the next phase The next phase is contingent on the type of page code entered 9 10 2 2 Live voice page codes Page codes that are used to make live voice announcements will elicit a voice prompt requesting the caller to speak the announcement into the microphone of their telephone handset It is important for the caller to wait until the prompt is finished before speaking Completion of the announcement is signaled by typing any key
252. ow have been right justified as it is considered more important to see the name of the wave file rather than the first fraction of the path when a file with a very long path is specified For files with short paths this may look unusual Q2 I have selected some WAV files to play but nothing happens What s the problem Al Check that the WAV files are of the correct format They must be 48kHz 16bit PCM mono 11 2 3 Background Events Why has the background event only got start time I want to turn off the background when we close for the night How do I set an off time Al Background events are only changes in the background sent to a zone To turn it off you simply create another event at the time you want to close that changes the background in all zones to None This makes it easier to do things like change the background several times throughout the day without having to ensure each background is stopped before a new one is started Q2 I am trying to set up a background event where one zone changes to a different source and the background in another zone turns off As I enter the change for the 2 zone my first assignment is being reset to unchanged What s going on A2 The scheduler stores the zones to which a source is to be sent with the background number hence you can t make multiple changes in the same background event This does not prevent multiple background events being scheduled at the same time and t
253. owering up to eight Control Matrix PCU Series stations and ten remote control panels The PCU 2100 operates one of two modes Dual or Redundant In Dual mode each bank of the PCU 2100 operates as independent power supply When operating the PCU 2100 in Redundant Mode the total capacity 1s reduced to half of what Dual Mode provides This is because the Bank B circuits are used as standby circuits for loads connected to Bank A When the PCU 2100 is in Redundant Mode there is 1 1 redundancy for each load If an output fails the stand by bank Bank B will take over providing seamless operation In addition the operator may be notified of the failure via relay contacts that operate on a fault The PCU 2100 also contains a buffered RS485 distribution repeater system for the control network employed by ControlMatrix This is similarly configured to the power supply two banks and there are three possible modes of operation see Section 8 3 7 for more details 3 4 MediaMatrix CABs MediaMatrix CAB8i or CAB16i units are required to bridge analog audio from paging stations and background sources to CobraNet for transport to the MediaMatrix In addition they provide the connection point for RS485 control network s from paging stations and wall mounted controllers Control data is also bridged over CobraNet to and from the Q Host MediaMatrix CAB80 or 1 units are required to transport audio from the MediaMatrix to amplifier chann
254. ox provided Finally enter a descriptive label that can be used to identify the sign It will not be possible to proceed until all the fields have been completed To remove one or a number of signs from the system select them by clicking on the appropriate items in the display sign list and then click the Remove Devices button To select a range of signs select the first item in the range and while holding down the Shift key select the last item in the range To select multiple signs at random hold down the Ctrl key while selecting the items to be removed one by one To save changes made to the display sign devices click the Done button 5 7 Telephone Paging Unit Manager The Telephone Paging Unit Manager administers creation deletion and configuration of Telephone Paging Units TPU1 TPU2 and TPU4 for the purpose of paging Telephone Paging Units TPU provide all necessary telephone line interfacing call progress and DTMF tone detection They are used by the Q Host to establish audio connections to the paging system for the purpose of recording an announcement and providing audio cues to the caller DTMF tones are used to specify the destination zones for the delivery of announcements Personal identification numbers PIN are used to provide secure access to the system Telephone Paging Units are controlled from a Q Host via a serial port refer Section Error Reference source not found for more information on possible TPU configurations
255. pad to edit the code to the desired selection Enter Code 000 for the RMPI to use whatever selection is made on the PCUA e Release the PCU4 microphone switch The desired selection 1s now stored in non volatile memory e Remove the power and reset the device address Note that while an RMPI is paging the selection made above is displayed on the LCD If an RMPI has been allocated to operate a selection that has not been allocated a Global Code in ControlMatrix Console the PCUA will display N A and no page will result V4 0US September 2004 Page 135 MediaMatrix 22 ControlMatrix User s Guide Installation Reference 8 3 2 Setting up a TPU1 EF200 Telephone Paging Unit The 1 ASPI EF200 telephone unit interfaces to the ControlMatrix system using an RS232 serial port Several devices can be interconnected on to the same serial port allowing a multi drop interface Each EF200 requires two audio lines an input and output a phone line and communications cable The address of a TPU1 EF200 must be set according to the ControlMatrix Setup telephone paging unit manager described in Section 5 7 For detailed information on the setup of TPU1 EF200 consult the User s Manual supplied with the unit Some details for interconnection with the ControlMatrix system are provided below Setting the address The address of a TPU1 EF200 can be set using the DIP switches accessible from the rear panel Valid a
256. panel an amber LED designated Wait and a green LED designated Go The primary action required to initiate a paging event from a PCU4 is pressing the microphone Ptt switch This action either sets up the system for a live page announcement into the microphone or releases a recorded message to the zones associated with the selected page code When making a live page the operator must press and hold the Ptt switch for the duration of the event The amber Wait indicator will initially illuminate while the system establishes audio paths checks for zone availability and plays a preamble if selected An amber indicator may be interpreted by the operator as Please Wait this message will be displayed on the LCD Once the system has made the microphone live the amber Wait indicator will extinguish and the green Go indicator will illuminate When this occurs the user can begin speaking into the microphone Thus for a live page a green indicator may be interpreted as Talk Now this message will be displayed on the LCD Usually the green indicator will extinguish when the button is released If the system is equipped with MessageNet and a zone is unavailable store and forward operation will be invoked In this instance the user should talk upon seeing the green indicator but the page will be recorded and replayed under control of the system MessageNet also makes possible Delayed Release announceme
257. press has been registered After 3 seconds the hot key s LED will begin to flash While still holding down that hot key type the desired page code into the numeric keypad of the PCUS Once the page code has been entered release the hot key The page code will have been programmed The LED of the hot key should still be lit solidly and the LCD should display its current page code Note that it is possible to program a hot key with a page code that is stored in another hot key If this is the case the page code will be deleted from the original hot key and stored in the last programmed key Page codes may only be represented once in the hot key bank with the exception of 000 V4 0US September 2004 Page 170 MediaMatrix lt p ControlMatrix User s Guide Using Devices Deleting a Hot Key Follow the programming instructions above to put a hot key into programming mode LED flashing and then type 000 as the page code to be stored When the page code has been entered release the hot key Hot Keys and Ptt The PCUS prevents use of the Ptt switch when a hot key is in the process of being pushed or programmed Conversely the PCUS also inhibits hot key use when Ptt is in use 9 9 Using an Paging Microphone 9 9 1 Description The provides a remote operation point for an associated PCU3 or PCU4 It cannot function in isolation It also shares much of the internal circuitry of the PCU3 or PCU4 and hence operation of an
258. r To More SVC1s Power Polarity not critical Cold Hot From Amplifier RS485 Date Figure 8 3 SVC1 Autotransformer and Speaker Connections 8 3 Peripheral Device Setup 8 3 1 Setting up 5 SVC2 SCP and PCU Devices 8 3 1 1 485 primer for device setup ControlMatrix uses a proprietary protocol known as CA485 to communicate on an RS485 network CA485 links PCUs SVCs and SCPs into the system for remote control CA485 is a multi drop protocol where all devices on an RS485 network are connected to the same wire pair for both reception and transmission Each device on the network must have a unique device address so that it can be identified This address is set on DIP switches at the V4 0US September 2004 Page 131 MediaMatrix 22 ControlMatrix User s Guide Installation Reference device and entered into the Q Host when running ControlMatrix Setup Usually ControlMatrix systems have only one RS485 network available at all CABs on the same CobraNet network although the ControlMatrix system permits up to four RS485 networks on separate CobraNet networks Each network has a master device Q Host or A Host accessed via CABs and RS485 ports and one or more slave devices PCUs etc It is possible to use the Q Host itself as a master however this requires installation of an approved RS232 RS485 adapter so that one of the host COM ports can be used Each RS485 network can have up
259. r 2004 Page 214 MediaMatrix 22 ControlMatrix User s Guide Advanced Topics The fifth file contains the QNX license keys All keys should be copied to all nodes on the network The initial installation contains 10 keys It is unlikely these will ever need to be added to however if required this is where it is done After making all of the required changes to the files use lt Alt X gt to exit and choose the save option unless it is necessary to back out from an error To make any of the changes take effect restart the system using ControlMatrix setup During the next restart check for any unusual messages that may indicate an error made during the above processes V4 0US September 2004 Page 215 MediaMatrix 22 ControlMatrix User s Guide Advanced Topics 12 4 5 Multiple CobraNet Networks The use of multiple CobraNet networks in a ControlMatrix system is an advanced application that should not be deployed unless the system scale demands it Assistance may be required with system architecture and configuration Implementing two CobraNet networks requires knowledge of how to run more than two networks in the QNX system modifying the standard initialization scripts and altering the network configuration The following procedure is recommended for advanced users only Determine the number of networks The only valid reason for running multiple CobraNet networks is that the system requires more than four broadcast bundles F
260. rd time in the text box labeled Abbreviation Standard Time V4 0US September 2004 Page 68 MediaMatrix 22 ControlMatrix User s Guide ControlMatrix Console Standard time in the local time zone will be either earlier or later than UTC or Greenwich Mean Time by a certain number of hours Enter the number of hours and minutes difference between local standard time and UTC Then use the drop down list to specify whether the time is earlier or later than UTC If daylight saving is not used in the local time zone select the is not used option in the drop down list box labeled Daylight saving If daylight saving is used the starting date and time must be specified along with the finishing date and time There are seven options available for both the starting and finishing time Commences on the day including leap days b Commences on the day excluding leap days c Commences on the first d Commences on the second Commences on the third f Commences on the fourth g Commences on the last The first two options a and b define daylight saving based on the number of days from the beginning of the year Enter the number of days in the text box provided and then enter the time at which day light saving becomes active on that day The remaining five options define daylight saving in terms of the day in a particular month of the year For example the first Sunday in March or the last Friday in November Select
261. re 5560 MessageNet cards This section assists system designers to determine the number required for a particular system Each 5560 MessageNet card is capable of eight concurrent message playback operations and four concurrent record operations Playback operations include recorded announcements released from PCUs scheduled announcements courtesy announcements using text to speech and playback of messages diverted to the store and forward system Record operations will be initiated when a live announcement is diverted to the store and forward system because one or more of its destination paging zones are busy 12 5 1 Procedure To determine the number of 5560 cards required for a given system first estimate the maximum number of playback operations that the system will be required to handle at any one time and divide that number by 8 rounding up Call this number P When estimating the number of simultaneous playback operations it is important to realize that several zones may occupy the same acoustic space It is unlikely that you would play concurrent messages within this acoustic space Thus the maximum number of playback operations should be less than or equal to the total number of distinct acoustic spaces Remember also that each TPU channel in the system requires a reserved playback channel when in operation Thus for example for each TPU4 4 additional simultaneous playback channels are required Now estimate the maximum numb
262. realized in a single MediaMatrix frame so this restriction is not likely to affect most users If this does appear to be a problem consult your dealer or the ControlMatrix support group as they may be able to suggest more resource efficient ways of implementing your requirements 11 4 ControlMatrix Courtesy FAQs Ql Courtesy starts up then indicates that it has no voices installed and quits What s wrong Al Voices need to be installed using ControlMatrix Setup See Section 5 3 for details on this 02 I try to make an announcement and Courtesy tells me that a communications error has occurred Can it be fixed 2 This usually means that the Speechify TTS server is not running or the computer on which it is running is off Try accessing the TTS server on its local machine and ensure that the server is running It is also worth ensuring that the Courtesy Host s IP address is correct as defined in ControlMatrix Setup V4 0US September 2004 Page 196 MediaMatrix 22 ControlMatrix User s Guide FAQs 11 5 Networking FAQs Ql How do I know I have correctly configured multiple network devices to be on the same IP Subnet 1 Both the IP address the Subnet Mask 4x 8 bit binary numbers represented in decimal form When a computer receives a packet from a network part of that packet is the IP header and this is checked against the computer s own IP address by testing the bits set by the Subnet Mask If the
263. required to initiate a paging event from a PCUI is pressing the Ptt button This action either sets up the system for a live page announcement into the microphone or releases a recorded message to the zones associated with the selected page code When making a live page the operator must press and hold the Ptt button for the duration of the event The indicator in the Ptt button will initially illuminate amber while the system establishes audio paths checks for zone availability and plays a preamble if selected An amber indicator may be interpreted as Please Wait The indicator will turn green once the system has made the microphone live when this occurs the user can begin speaking into the microphone Thus for a live page a green indicator may be interpreted as Talk Now Usually the indicator will extinguish when the button is released If the system is equipped with MessageNet and a zone is unavailable store and forward operation will be invoked In this instance the user should talk upon seeing a green indicator but the page will be recorded and replayed under control of the system MessageNet also makes possible Delayed Release announcements where an announcement is recorded and released after a delay and as soon as destination zones are available giving the operator an option to cancel the announcement This mode applies to particular page codes each of which must be configured for Delayed Release see
264. rive of the Q Host Next click once on the Add from floppy button A prompt will appear requesting licensee information Enter the name of the person or company licensed to use this system and then click the Done button The location information will be filled in from the data on the floppy disk and all the available licenses will be copied onto the Q Host Once this process is complete the valid license keys will be listed on the right side of the dialog To add license keys manually first type the name of the person or company licensed to use this system in the text box below the Licensed to label Next enter the location of the installation in the text box labeled Location exactly as it appears on the license certificate If the location does not match that used to create the license keys the system will reject them Finally type the license keys one by one into the text box beside the label Enter new license clicking the Add License button to copy the key onto the Q Host V4 0US September 2004 Page 44 MediaMatrix 22 ControlMatrix User s Guide ControlMatrix Console To remove one or a number of license keys from the Q Host select them by clicking on the appropriate items in the license key list then click the Remove Licenses button To select a range of licenses select the first item in the range and then while holding down the Shift key select the last item in the range To select multiple licenses at random hold down the Ctrl key wh
265. rix lt p ControlMatrix User s Guide Using Devices 9 9 2 2 Press to talk Button Status indicator The Press to talk switch is located on the side of the microphone Associated with this switch and located on front panel is a Status indicator that may illuminate amber or green The primary action required to initiate a paging event from a PCU3 is pressing the Ptt switch This action either sets up the system for a live page announcement into the microphone or releases a recorded message to the zones associated with the selected page code When making a live page the operator must press and hold the Ptt switch for the duration of the event The Status indicator will initially illuminate amber while the system establishes audio paths checks for zone availability and plays a preamble if selected An amber indicator may be interpreted as Please Wait The indicator will turn green once the system has made the microphone live when this occurs the user can begin speaking into the microphone Thus for a live page a green indicator may be interpreted as Talk Now Usually the indicator will extinguish when the switch is released If the system is equipped with MessageNet and a zone is unavailable store and forward operation will be invoked In this instance the user should talk upon seeing a green indicator but the announcement will be recorded and replayed under control of the system MessageNet also make
266. rix User s Guide Getting Started When these settings are used the LED meters on the front of the CAB devices will display the lowest green LED only on the presence of signal This is normal The level of the paging preamble message played by a ControlMatrix system is fixed The factory installed preamble message has an average level 20dB below system digital full scale The message will appear at the input of the MediaMatrix reading approximately 0dB on a MediaMatrix meter Thus the standard preamble message will be replayed at 2dB below a standard paging announcement from a PCU see above In order that the user can adjust the relativity of preamble message to paging announcement ControlMatrix is supplied with a set of preamble message files that vary in level as read on the MediaMatrix meter from 6dB to 6dB in 1 dB steps Choose appropriate level preamble message for use with your system see Section 6 5 3 Preamble Selection This choice will depend on factors such as the ambient noise level in the paging environment 4 1 41 Setting the Zones Output Levels Once the system is running audio outputs to all zones should be checked and the system levels set Standard procedures for setting sound reinforcement levels may be used with a ControlMatrix system however for optimum performance use the following guidelines 1 Set the CAB Full Scale Output Level View File CABo device for the hardware links in the
267. rm Card requires no setup other than installation of an External Alarms Module license see above however it does require configuration see Section 5 10 All AHCI Alarm Card outputs are voltage free relay contacts Relays are de energized in the alarm state thereby permitting power loss alarm indication Alarm states will be output while the host s are powered down and during system boot AHCI relay contacts are recommended for use 50V or lower and currents of less than 1 amp Alarm outputs 1 through 4 are provided with both normally open and normally closed contacts while outputs 5 through 8 have normally open contacts only AHCI Alarm Card Inputs are bi directional opto isolator circuits requiring application of 10 50VDC of either polarity Once an alarm input is enabled in software if this voltage is not present on that input an alarm will be produced input and output connections are via a 37 pin D subminiature connector on the card rear The card has a female connector and a mating male connector is delivered with the AHCI Pinouts are shown in Table 8 1 V4 0US September 2004 Page 139 ControlMatrix User s Guide Installation Reference MediaMatrix 22 Function Circuit Connection D37 Pin Relay Common Contact 2 External Alarm Output 1 Relay Normally Open Contact 1 Relay Normally Closed C
268. rol is used to select the day of interest Note If the scheduler is disabled the scheduler preview will show what would have happened The right side of the Preview dialog displays the schedule for the selected day Each event is listed displaying its descriptive label the type of event and the time it will occur Below the event list is the event details area EN Time Description 9 30 Baggage ance 5 Message 8 35 Baggage ance 5 Message 940 Baggage ance 5 Message 945 Baggage ance 5 Message 9 50 Baggage ance 5 Message 9 55 Baggage ance 5 Message Enable BGM at 10 Background Baggage ance 5 Message Baggage ance 5 Message Baggage ance 5 Message paging zone Baggage ance 5 Message Baggage ance 5 Message AND Recorded Message W Any Baggage ance 5 Message Any message Baggage ance 5 Message AND Background Source Any e vest Baggage ance 5 Message Any source AND Assignable Input Any Main Concourse Any input EI PUEDES ermina AND Event Type Any Terminal B type KJ Golden Wing Lounge Schedule for 18 July 2002 complete Figure 6 20 Schedule Preview Dialog Select an event item in the preview event list and the relevant event details will be displayed below In the case of a recorded message this will be the destination zones and the sequence of messages Reveal the zones by clicking on the Zones tab and the messages by clicking on the Attributes tab Des
269. round Sources to Zones V4 0US September 2004 Page 102 MediaMatrix 22 ControlMatrix User s Guide ControlMatrix Console Click the Apply button to schedule the event once configured The Done button will have the same effect but will in addition close the Schedule Configuration dialog User Input Event The scheduler can assign a specified user input to a list of destination paging zones at a particular time on a given day These assignments will become active only if all the destination paging zones are currently idle no page active to them or the assignment is given sufficient priority to override any existing page The process for configuration of this type of event is similar to that used for Recorded Message events The user input assignment event must be given a unique label Use the text box in the upper right corner of the configuration pane to change the event label The next step is to specify the event timing parameters using the controls on the Timing tab in the same way that it was done for Recorded Message events A particular user input assignment event can occur only once on a given day The assignment duration is specified by the start and finish times for the event It is therefore necessary to specify a start and finish time by typing the hours and minutes in twenty four hour format into the appropriate text boxes As an alternative use the up and down arrow controls to set the time The Assignment tab is used to
270. rovides access to the courtesy message editor of ControlMatrix Console Courtesy messages are announcements that contain one or more WAV files played in a predetermined sequence with a single speech insertion generated from text The result is a sentence composed of concatenated phrases derived from the WAV files and the text to speech insert Such sentences are commonly used for courtesy announcements in large venues where a person s name is inserted into a standard sentence hence the terminology Courtesy announcement message or sequence Text is converted to speech by a Text to Speech TTS engine see Section 7 1 1 Courtesy sequences are defined using the Courtesy Message Configuration dialog This dialog is divided into four panes that are accessed using tabs labeled Message List Section 6 6 1 Text Attributes Section 6 6 2 Preview amp Voice Section 6 6 3 Zone Selection Section 6 6 4 6 6 1 Courtesy Message List The message list of a courtesy sequence defines the audio contained within a courtesy sequence It consists of a collection of messages with one courtesy text insertion Courtesy Sequences Description Priorit Twenty minute arrival message Twenty minute message Low kl Registration Ann t gistration Announcement PEN zu Play preamble Me Report to service desk List attributes amp Voice Selection Available Messages Sequence of Messages Promote Demote fcm wav
271. rt It also monitors the incoming serial stream and if required generates a system alarm This alarm appears in the alarm display the log and also on alarm output configured for Cobber Link status The Q Host monitors the health of each network interface and its own HDD space Due to the fact that it is running it also monitors by implication the basic health of the processor RAM etc V4 0US September 2004 Page 223 MediaMatrix lt p ControlMatrix User s Guide Advanced Topics Failure of any of these elements will cause the Cobber Link output to be suppressed raising an alarm on the other host The health of network interfaces is monitored by testing whether the host can see any of the devices that should be available on that interface If all of the devices are offline the host decides that network interface is non functional As a consequence the host might be deemed to be unserviceable if for example MediaMatrix units are down or the switch connected to the network interface is powered down Care needs to be taken with the information to decide on the best course of action when a Cobber fault is detected 12 6 3 Redundant MediaMatrix support In support of the redundant hardware concept it is possible for two MediaMatrix units to be listed in the configuration When this is done the system automatically drives the two frames in similar fashion ensuring the two frames are operating identically at all times To support this
272. s Pinouts are in the process of being standardized When terminating audio connections the installer must check the Hi Lo and markings adjacent to the device connectors and make connections accordingly It is also necessary to check this if equipment is exchanged for service Incorrect termination of audio will not damage the equipment but may prevent the device from operating correctly V4 0US September 2004 Page 130 MediaMatrix lt p ControlMatrix User s Guide Installation Reference 8 2 5 SVCI Autotransformer Connection The SVC1 requires an external autotransformer to attenuate the constant voltage line speaker signal note that SVC1 20 devices have an internal transformer suitable for 20 watt loads Installer supplied autotransformers permit tailoring of SVCs to any power or audio quality requirement The SVCI will support transformers designed for up to a 200W speaker load in a 100V system and 140W in a 70V system Transformers should have at least 6 connections four taps plus the two ends The attenuation steps are arbitrary but a suggested set are listed below with the voltage steps given for 70V 100V systems Tap 6 Top of winding 5 6dB 35V 50V Tap4 I2dB 17 5V 25V 3 18dB 8 75 12 5V 2 244 4 38V 6 25V 1 Bottom of winding The autotransformer and 100V or 70V speaker should be connected to the SVC1 as shown below Warning Do not swap amplifier and speake
273. s for use on individual keypad paging stations PCU2 PCU4 or PCUS Hardware ID See CAB Address Host An item of hardware that may contain both software and hardware components dedicated to executing system functions and residing on a network Input Label A descriptive name given to ControlMatrix system inputs Input Type Inputs may be of the following types e PCU connected to a PCU paging station Background used to convey background audio to the system e User a user input located somewhere the campus covered by the ControlMatrix system or e SCP Local a user input dedicated to use by an SCP Telephone connected to a Telephone Paging Unit Inputs Menu A menu in ControlMatrix Console that facilitates management and configuration of system inputs e g Background and input devices e g PCUS IP address The method by which hosts identify each other on an Internet Protocol network Many devices in the ControlMatrix system use IP to exchange control information For more information see http www webopedia com TERM I IP_address html Live page real time announcement made by an operator using PCU Local SCP An input that can be assigned to a paging zone using the Local button on an SCP controller This is usually installed in close proximity to the SCP hence it is or in the locale the SCP Local Input See Local SCP MAC addres
274. s The method that individual Ethernet devices use to identify themselves on an Ethernet network This operates at a lower level than the IP address All devices on an Ethernet have a MAC address but only those that use IP communications need an IP address More info see http www webopedia com TERM M MAC address html MediaMatrix An audio output from the MediaMatrix In ControlMatrix terms these are Outputs commonly paging zones or feeds to the Store and forward system Other MediaMatrix outputs can be used for any purpose supported by the MediaMatrix e g monitoring MediaMatrix The configuration files used by MediaMatrix to define the audio system View File implemented by the digital signal processing engine in the unit It allows control of the various parameters required to perform the processing Message A recorded audio announcement Replayed on command MessageNet The component of ControlMatrix that manages message replay and recording for store and forward MessageNet Card device used for transferring file audio from storage HDD or memory via a PCI bus to CobraNet under control of MessageNet software The complete title of this card is S560 MessageNet card Miscellaneous System alarms that do not fall into any of the other pre defined categories Alarms Network or Networked Systems two or more ControlMatrix systems linked together in a network for the purpose of increasing system scale or providing common features
275. s possible Delayed Release announcement where a message is recorded and released after a delay giving the operator an option to cancel the delayed announcement for an expanded description of this function see Section 9 5 2 4 Cancel If the PCU2 page code selection is for a recorded message playback rather than a live page the Ptt button is used to start the message Again the button is pressed and held The indicator in the button will illuminate amber when the button is pressed While the button is held there will be one of two outcomes a The amber indicator will change to green and begin to flash If this occurs the message replay request has been accepted and the LCD will display Req Queued see Section 9 5 2 4 The message will then be placed in a queue and will be played as soon as all zones for which it is destined are available As soon as the green indicator flashes the operator can release the Ptt button and the indicator will extinguish OR b The amber indicator extinguishes If this occurs the message request has failed The LCD will display Req Failed see Section 9 5 2 4 The operator should release the Ptt button and investigate the reason for failure If the unit is fitted with a key operated security switch the Ptt button will not function unless the key is turned fully clockwise 9 5 2 3 Selection Keypad A twelve button keypad telephone style is used to select the required page code In addition to t
276. s possible Delayed Release announcements where an announcement is recorded and released after a delay and as soon as destination zones are available giving the operator an option to cancel the announcement This mode applies to particular page codes each of which must be configured for Delayed Release see Section 6 2 1 While making a delayed announcement Status indications are as for a standard live announcement 1 e Amber Please Wait Green Talk Now After the operator has finished making the announcement and the Ptt switch is released the Status LED will flash amber for five seconds If the operator presses the Ptt switch within this five second period the delayed announcement will be discarded and the system will return to idle status If five seconds elapses without a Ptt switch press the delayed announcement will be released for playback If the page code assigned to the is for a recorded message playback rather than a live page the Ptt switch is used to start the message Again the switch is pressed and held The amber Wait indicator will illuminate amber when the switch is pressed While the switch is held there will be one of two outcomes a The amber indicator will change to green and begin to flash If this occurs the message replay request has been accepted The message will be placed in a queue and will be played as soon as all zones for which it is destined are available As soon as the green in
277. s to all other help documents available on the Q Host The help documents are searchable and able to be book marked for future reference NOTE Help is not available when Console is started using the ControlMatrix Windows Client A separate help icon is provided in this instance Also accessible from the Help Menu is an About box that displays the current release version of Console V4 0US September 2004 Page 120 MediaMatrix lt p ControlMatrix User s Guide ControlMatrix Console V4 0US September 2004 Page 121 Media Matrix LB US ControlMatrix Courtesy Reference MediaMatrix 22 ControlMatrix User s Guide 7 1 ControlMatrix Courtesy ControlMatrix Courtesy is a separately licensed ControlMatrix module that provides the capability to choose and release Courtesy Messages These are announcements that contain one or more WAV files played in a predetermined sequence with a single speech insertion automatically generated from text The result is a sentence composed of concatenated phrases derived from the WAV files and the text to speech insert Such sentences are commonly used for courtesy announcements in large venues where for example a person s name is inserted into a standard sentence Hence the terminology Courtesy announcement message or sequence A Text to Speech TTS engine converts the inserted text to speech see Section 7 1 1 Courtesy sequences are defined using the Courtesy
278. s to be taken with speech inflections at the beginning and end of phrases Neutral inflections provide a more natural connection between joining phrases V4 0US September 2004 Page 202 MediaMatrix 22 ControlMatrix User s Guide Advanced Topics 12 2 4Basic Procedure Record the required messages using the guidelines provided in 12 2 2 and 12 2 3 Ensure that the recording is noise free and undistorted Use a PC based editing program to normalize the audio level according to the guidelines provided in 12522 Save the files 48kHz 16 bit mono PCM format Take note of the filename associated with the text for each recording Before WAV files can be used by the ControlMatrix system they must be transferred to the Q Host hard disk drive See Section 6 5 for details of how to transfer the files using ControlMatrix Console Message Manager 12 2 5 Text Association for Signs A ControlMatrix system can include text message signs that display the text of a recorded message while the message is played This text must be stored as in a file associated with the relevant WAV file It is most likely that the text file will contain the same words used to record the message but other perhaps simpler wording may be substituted Refer to Section 6 5 2 for further information about text association V4 0US September 2004 Page 203 MediaMatrix lt p ControlMatrix User s Guide Advanced Topics 12 3 Telephone Paging Unit Voice Prompts
279. selection switch will cause the lamps to toggle state the on lamp indicating the selection that will be used when the is operated If no lamps are on the RMP1 will use whatever selection is set on PCU3 at the time the is activated It is possible to set more than one of the selection switches on however the can only operate one selection If more than one selection is set the leftmost one will be used by the e Set the desired selection one of the four buttons or none e Release the microphone switch The desired selection is now stored in non volatile memory The bouncing dot display will appear on the switches e Remove the power and reset the device address Note that while an is paging the selection made above is displayed on the buttons If an to be allocated to operate a selection has not been allocated a page code in ControlMatrix Console the RMP1 will operate that selection on the PCU3 but no page will result To reprogram a PCUA for a different RMPI selection e Make a note of the current device address if it is necessary to maintain the same address e Set the device address to 0 e Remove power from the PCUA e Hold the PCU4 microphone switch while reapplying power and continue to hold the switch until the procedure is finished The LCD will now display RMP1 Code XYZ where XYZ is the current selection used by the RMPI e Use the key
280. ser s Guide Advanced Topics MediaMatrix lt p Wave file name Text tpu_prompt_bad_pin wav lt 2 second silent leader gt Bad access code Try again tpu_prompt_cancel_query wav lt 2 second silent leader gt To cancel playback press any key tpu_prompt_code wav lt 2 second silent leader gt Enter a three digit paging code then pound tpu_prompt_code_error wav lt 2 second silent leader gt Bad paging code Try again tpu_prompt_page_cancelled wav lt 2 second silent leader gt Page cancelled tpu_prompt_page_submitted wav lt 2 second silent leader gt Page submitted tpu_prompt_seq_play wav lt 2 second silent leader gt Playback request queued tpu_prompt_speak_now wav lt 2 second silent leader gt Speak your page now tpu_prompt_welcome wav lt Site Name gt Paging system Enter access code then pound Table 12 3 Abbreviated voice prompts V4 0US September 2004 Page 206 MediaMatrix 22 ControlMatrix User s Guide Advanced Topics 124 Multiple Node System Configuration 12 4 1 Pr cis Larger ControlMatrix installations will have more than a single QNX node Additional QNX nodes serve a variety of purposes and may be of type Q Host A Host or C Host depending on requirements Because the standard installation procedure does not completely configure multiple host systems some manual interv
281. sist with network fault analysis 8 1 2 Field Equipment The use of CobraNet to convey many channels of audio over a single network cable allows a network of remote wiring clusters to be established close to the signal sources e g PCUs and destinations e g amplifiers thus significantly reducing installation time and cost When planning a system gather devices in one or more decentralized wiring clusters to capitalize on this feature placing the clusters as close as possible to the signal sources and amplifiers More information about distribution of the Ethernet to field wiring clusters can be found in Section 8 2 1 8 2 System Wiring 8 2 1 Ethernet Networks ControlMatrix requires two distinct and separate Ethernet networks These are the ControlNet network and the CobraNet network While there are several methods of achieving separate networks the preferred method is to use one or more managed Ethernet switches that support multiple VLANs Virtual Local Area Networks If the system is very compact only a few field wiring clusters that are located close to the central equipment a single large switch may be more cost effective than multiple smaller switches however this will require each CAB in the field equipment to have a network cable run back to the central equipment As network cables 5 have a maximum length of 100m 300ft larger more widely spread systems usually require more switches located at suitable points with
282. stablished on each network link If the command is repeated the display should show the packet counts rising V4 0US September 2004 Page 213 MediaMatrix 22 ControlMatrix User s Guide Advanced Topics Easier ways to perform all of the above processes All of the above explains the details of the steps required to deploy nodes in a multi node system It also gives the background as to what each of the commands and steps actually does To make the process of changing nodes simpler a couple of tools have been provided These automate to some extent the processes of changing a node number and making the configuration changes required to support the new node To access these tools perform the following steps Login to the host as root By default a cleanly installed node will be logical node number one and there will be no root password If the login prompt does not allow access using root and no password contact the person who initially set up the machine for the new password You will be presented with a toolbar at the base of the screen with three tabs One of these is the System tab Click on the System tab Two icons will be displayed If the pointer is placed over an icon its name will be displayed The first icon will change the node number of the machine To change the node number click on this icon and follow the prompts and alter the number to the new number desired Be aware that the node number of the machine will
283. stage to direct the configuration process ControlMatrix Setup starts in wizard mode by default To switch to standard mode next time Setup is started uncheck the Use wizard mode next time button at the bottom of the window 5 1 3 Standard Mode Standard mode is more useful to experienced users providing a menu driven interface and fast random access to any or all of the configuration dialog boxes Dialogs Menus may be selected from the menu bar with the mouse or accessed by using the following hot keys Alt N access the Network menu Alt D Device Manager menu Alt I System Input Configuration dialog Alt O Zone Attribute Configuration dialog Alt A Alarm Manager dialog Alt U To access the User Manager dialog Alt F System Configuration Files menu Alt S access the System menu Alt H access the Help menu To switch immediately to wizard mode select the Switch to wizard mode item in the System menu The following sections describe each of the system configuration dialog boxes in detail explaining their purpose and function V4 0US September 2004 Page 43 MediaMatrix 22 ControlMatrix User s Guide ControlMatrix Console 5 2 Licensing Dialog The ControlMatrix Licensing Dialog Figure 5 1 is the first dialog encountered when operating in wizard mode This dialog is used to enter the modular licenses that enable specific features of the ControlMatrix system Each ControlMatrix license is tied to a particular installati
284. state of a dry contact and display its state as an alarm in the ControlMatrix system Inputs designated as Alarm Acknowledge type inputs acknowledge or clear the New Alarm signal see above whenever the input makes a transition from high to low Edit Label Emergency warning system Emergency warning system UPS Fault Active Fire Sprinklers Active External override Active Amp status Active Unused Unused Unused Unused Unused Unused Unused Unused Unused Unused Unused Unused Unused Unused Figure 5 19 Defining MediaMatrix Alarms The Alarm Manager s MediaMatrix Alarms tab is used to display and configure MediaMatrix alarms To enable a MediaMatrix alarm select the appropriate item in the list of MediaMatrix alarms then from the Alarm State drop down list box select the Active option It is possible to select multiple alarms and to change them all to the same state simultaneously To disable an alarm or group of alarms select the appropriate items in the alarms list and then choose the Unused option from the Alarm State drop down list box To change the label for a particular MediaMatrix alarm select it from the list of alarms then type the new label into the Edit Label text box V4 0US September 2004 Page 64 ControlMatrix User s Guide ControlMatrix Console No hot water General Alarm Bath overflow General Alarm Fridge empty General Alarm TV Broken General Alarm Unused Unused Unused Unused Unused U
285. system searches to see if the numeric combination represents a valid selection V4 0US September 2004 Page 167 MediaMatrix 22 ControlMatrix User s Guide Using Devices 9 8 2 4 LCD Display A sixteen character two line rear illuminated display provides visual feedback to the operator of the selected page code page code description and paging status For clarity the display is divided into three regions as follows Display Region 1 Top Line first three character spaces Display Region 2 Bottom Line Display Region 3 Top Line remaining character spaces Display Region 1 Page Code As page codes are entered on the keypad they appear in Region 1 Display Region 2 Description When a page code is fully entered on the keypad the description of that page code as configured in ControlMatrix Console see Section 6 2 1 will appear in Region 2 In place of the page code description one of three other terms may be displayed in Region 2 as follows Please Wait This display indicates that the PCU is currently sourcing the page code description from the ControlMatrix System It may appear for a brief period only Code Barred This display indicates that the code selected is not an Active Code for this PCU2 While the code may be defined as a Global Code it has not been allocated for use on this unit Undefined Code This display indicates that the code selected has not been defined in the ControlMatrix system D
286. t CobraNet S560s may be Q Host A Host and or A Host S560 MessageNet card s MediaMatrix SBC network port ControlNet MediaMatrix CobraNet CobraNet DPU card s MediaMatrix CABs CobraNet Controlled Controlling devices ControlNet Such as remote Windows PC accessing system Ensure that all required network cabling permanent and patch cords is in place If using a partitioned Ethernet switch for VLANs configure at least two VLANs to separate the CobraNet and ControlNet networks and assign an adequate number of ports to each VLAN If more than one switch is being used each must be configured consult installation information provided with the Ethernet switch 4 1 4 Install Field Equipment Typically several items of field equipment are installed away from the central equipment in convenient locations clustered around localized connection points At these points cables converge from groups of PCU devices amplifiers and or wall mounted controllers Field equipment may also include MediaMatrix CABi input and or CABo output device Each CAB must have a separate CobraNet network cable back to the central switch Larger systems may require an Ethernet switch at each field connection point with a single network cable or optic fiber forming a backbone to the central switch During installation all CABs must have their CobraNet V4 0US September 2004 Page 30 MediaMatrix 22 ControlMatrix User s Guide Getti
287. t does not have zone selection instead paging is to one of the zone groups assigned to the PCU3 or PCUA This selection defaults to the first PCU3 button or lowest active PCU4 code however a programming procedure on PCU3s and PCU4s allows this to be altered if required 3 32 Telephone Paging Units Three types of telephone paging units are available in the ControlMatrix range The EF200 the TPU2 and TPUA provide a one two and four telephone line interface respectively Each units facilitates voice paging or the release of recorded announcements Selection is made using a three digit paging code identical to that used for PCU2 and PCUA paging stations Pre recorded voice prompts are provided to direct the caller for the duration of each transaction A four digit P I N is employed to provide secure access to the system 3 3 3 Wall Mount Controllers SCP Control Panel The SCP is a general purpose control panel that interfaces via a RS485 serial link to a CAB for remote control of system functions The panel includes a level control volume display and selection of one of four background sources or a local input A Page Inhibit button locks out paging to the SCP zone SVCI Speaker Volume Control The SVC1 paging speaker volume control may be used for local volume control of constant voltage 70 or 100 volt line loudspeakers There are two versions of the SVC1 The SVC1 20 includes an inbuilt attenuator autotransformer suitabl
288. t panel is identical to an SVC1 with two push buttons to change the local speaker volume through one of six levels between off and full see Section 9 1 above As for an SVC1 when an SVC2 receives data indicating that it is part of a group of zones receiving a page it will automatically switch to full volume The background source selection will remain unchanged If an SVC2 is located in a zone that also contains a paging station and associated with that paging station in ControlMatrix Setup the SVC2 will mute the zone speakers during a page from that paging station 9 3 Using an SCP Controller 9 3 1 Description SCP panels facilitate source selection and volume control in a Zone by remotely controlling the MediaMatrix A typical application is in a banquet hall or airport concourse where the zone is large and may require more than one amplifier channel loudspeaker circuit to cover the area As with an SVC2 an SCP controls both volume and selection of background music It also allows the user to inhibit paging into a zone and can select a Local Input associated with the zone if installed Local inputs are a means of introducing local audio sources to a zone Local audio sources are intended only for the zone in which they originate An example is live entertainment where the output of a performer s audio mixer located in the zone may be fed into the Local Input The input selected by the SCPs local button is configured in the ControlM
289. t the time pane Click on the left and right arrows at the top of the calendar to select the appropriate year and V4 0US September 2004 Page 67 MediaMatrix 22 ControlMatrix User s Guide ControlMatrix Console month Select the day of the month by clicking on the desired day square It will become highlighted in yellow To save the current date and time click the Done button You must restart the Q Host for time changes to take effect A prompt will appear when Setup is closed down recommending a restart of the system System Time 00000000 Set the time Time Zones amp ustralia Yancowinna Abbreviation Standard Time CST Daylight saving Local time is 09 hours 00 minutes earlier than UTC Daylight saving commences on the last x 2 W AM Sunday in October at 02 00 and finishes on last x E F AM Sunday in March at 02 Saving time is 10 hours 00 minutes earlier than UTC Apply Figure 5 23 Creating new time zone To create a new time zone or edit an existing one select the Times Zones tab To create a new time zone enter the name of the time zone in the text area of the drop down list box The name must not contain any spaces By convention the name should begin with the name of the country followed by the character and then the name of the state province or city Next enter a three or four character abbreviation for standa
290. tart time by typing the hours and minutes in twenty four hour format into the appropriate text box As an alternative use the up and down arrow controls to set the time Use the same procedure described for Recorded Message events to specify the days for which the event will be active The Assignment tab is used to allocate background sources to paging zones This assignment will occur at the time specified on the Timing tab Only one assignment can be made per event To define the background assignment select the zones that will be assigned the same music source from the Paging Zone list This can be achieved for a contiguous range of zone by selecting the first zone in the group then while holding down the Shift key select the last zone Alternatively select zones at random while holding down the Ctrl key Once the zone group has been established choose the desired background source from the drop down list All zones not in the selected group will revert to Unchanged To turn the background off for a group of zones select the None option By default all zones will be left unchanged Background Event Event Label Enatie BGM at 10 O Timing Assignment Eventis JF Enabled Background Source CD Player Paging zone Main Concourse Unchanged Terminal USER DEFINED Terminal B Unchanged Golden Wing Lounge Unchanged Food court Unchangi Gate Lounge 14 Scheduler is Enabled Figure 6 18 Allocating Backg
291. te 456 forms a decimal number between 001 and 255 with leading 05 included Binary coded numbers have 4 bits with the top select switch lamp in the PCUI and left select switch lamp on the PCU3 being the most significant bit value 8 if on the next switch value 4 the third value 2 and the bottom right switch lamp being value 1 PCU Microphone Gain Adjustment Each PCU microphone preamplifier gain control is factory preset to produce approximately OdBu output for average paging speech PCUS include a two stage compressor limiter to optimize output dynamics The gain control is pre dynamics and therefore resetting the control may affect the sound of a PCU Under normal circumstances it should not be necessary to adjust PCU gain If required the gain preset is located on the rear of each unit some earlier PCUs have the gain control located behind an unlabeled hole on the front panel A small non conductive preset adjustment tool should be used for adjustment PCU Button Labels PCU1 and PCU3 only The buttons used for page event selection can have labels inserted to identify their page code or paging event The clear part of the caps can be removed by gently lifting a corner with a fingernail or knife and paper or film inserts can be placed inside the cap Two MSWord templates for button labels are provided the ControlMatrix installation disk PCUIA4SWITCHLABELS DOT for ISO 4 size paper and PCUILETTERSWITCHLABELS DOT for US Lett
292. tem of the Q Host The system configuration archive includes Network devices configuration CA485 devices configuration V4 0US September 2004 Page 70 MediaMatrix lt p ControlMatrix User s Guide ControlMatrix Console Display signs configuration Telephone paging unit configuration System input configuration Zone attributes Alarms configuration Current time zone Paging station configuration Scheduler configuration Courtesy announcement configuration It specifically excludes ControlMatrix licenses User database Recorded announcement WAV files Text associated with recorded announcements V4 0US September 2004 Page 71 MediaMatrix 22 ControlMatrix User s Guide ControlMatrix Console 5 13 1 Save Configuration The Save Configuration item in the Files menu provides a mechanism for storing the entire ControlMatrix system configuration to an archive file on the file system of the Q Host From here it could be copied to another host if desired 4096 Dec 10 10 32 Filename Pattem Figure 5 25 Save system configuration dialog To save the current system configuration select the Save Configuration item in the Files menu Use the Save System Configuration file selection dialog box to select the destination directory for the configuration archive Enter the name of the archive into the Filename text box then click the Save As button The Pattern text box provides a
293. tem required Systems that utilize courtesy announcements and Text to Speech TTS require another host known as the C Host The C Host runs a text to speech server program that communicates with the Q Host 1 4 Field Equipment Field equipment has two main functions collection and distribution of audio and user control of the system Some field devices deal only with audio some with control and some combine both audio and control functions Field equipment includes e Paging Stations available in simple four function buttons or full featured 999 choice LCD and keypad options these stations facilitate live paging and can also release sequences of recorded messages Telephone Paging Units provide a telephone interface to the paging system They enable voice paging and the release of sequences of recorded messages via the telephone Wall Mounted Controllers allow source selection and volume control for a zone depending on the controller device used e MediaMatrix CABs provide the interface of audio to and from the CobraNet At least one CAB is required in the system to bridge CA485 control packets from the CobraNet to other field devices e Power Supplies provide DC power for the Paging Stations and Wall Mounted Controllers Field equipment interconnections include RS485 audio power and Ethernet 1 4 1 CA485 Throughout this manual the term CA485 is used to describe communications between field devices
294. th Similarly the Finish Date can be set using the calendar or by clicking the associated Today button It may be desirable to have an event without a finish date In this case click the None button Recorded Message Events The scheduler is capable of triggering the playback of a sequence of recorded messages to a specified list of paging zones This type of event is available only for systems with MessageNet installed Having created a new recorded message event it is necessary to configure a number of parameters associated with the event Firstly all scheduled events must be given a unique descriptive label Type the label into the Event Label text box at the top right corner of the configuration pane The label may be up to 40 characters long Next use the Timing tab described in the previous section to specify when the event will occur Destination Paging Zones It is necessary to specify the destination for a particular Recorded Message event The Destination tab provides controls that specify the destination paging zones for the playback of messages Select a paging zone from the Available Zones list using the mouse cursor and then click the Add button to make the selected zone part of the Destination Zones list The Available Zones list contains the names of all the paging zones not currently assigned as destination for the playback To remove zones from the destination list select the zone then click the Remove button It is poss
295. th field is the Subid and identifies different instances of a particular process The fifth field Node indicates the host node number on which the process is running The PID field contains the process ID of the process issuing the log entry Finally the Message field contains the log message A search facility is provided to enable entries containing key words to be located quickly and easily To search for an entry containing a particular key work first click the Search button or use the Alt S hotkey to reveal the search dialog Enter the text to search for into the text box being sure to use the correct case To find the next occurrence of the text entered starting from the current position in the log click the Down button The Up button will locate an occurrence of the text string present in the log prior to the current location The Ignore Case check box determines whether the search is case sensitive or not Click the Done button to close the search dialog V4 0US September 2004 Page 119 MediaMatrix 22 ControlMatrix User s Guide ControlMatrix Console To go to the first log entry click the Home button To go to the most recent log entry click the End button To close the System Log viewer click the Done button 6 8 Help Menu The Help Menu is used to access specific help topics relevant to ControlMatrix Console via the built in help viewer A link is also provided which provides access to the system overview documents and link
296. the SVC1 20 The 5 20 has in built autotransformer that can control loads of up to 20 watts and is suitable for 70V or 100V systems If a larger load must be controlled an SVC1 should be used The SVC1 must be connected to an external tapped autotransformer not supplied with SVCI to control the speaker level Transformers are chosen to match the speaker load see Chapter 8 SVC2 units have internal autotransformers for 30 watt or 60 watt loads on constant voltage line circuits Up to four speaker lines are required each originating from independent power amplifier channels allocated to the zone Each one carries a different background but all carry the same paging audio V4 0US September 2004 Page 31 MediaMatrix 22 ControlMatrix User s Guide Getting Started As SVCIs and SVC2s are installed their RS485 addresses should be set and recorded see Chapter 8 Knowledge of each SVC address is required when configuring the system 4 1 4 4 Install SCP Wall Mounted Controllers Similar to SVC controllers SCPs are located in the zone over which they have control They require two cables power and RS485 Power is supplied from a central PCU 2100 power supply typically located at a field wiring cluster RS485 originates from a local as for PCUs See Chapter 8 for additional information about power and RS485 connections As SCPs are installed their RS485 addresses should be set and recorded see Chapter 8 Knowledge of each
297. the position of a message in the sequence select it in the Sequence of Messages list Press the Promote button to raise it within the list or press the Demote button to lower it in the list Paging information priority and whether or not to play a preamble of a courtesy sequence can also be changed To change the priority choose an option from the Priority drop down list box To play the preamble prior to the sequence make sure that the Play Preamble box is ticked Each courtesy message must be given a unique description by typing directly into the Description box V4 0US September 2004 Page 113 MediaMatrix 22 ControlMatrix User s Guide ControlMatrix Console 6 6 2 Courtesy Text Attributes A sequence can have text attributes associated with it for display on associated signs In order for text to be displayed messages must have associated text see Section 6 5 2 for more information As illustrated in Figure 6 25 text color and display mode can be changed Text can also be enabled or disabled from this section of the dialog Courtesy Sequences Description Priority Twenty minute arrival message Twenty minute arrival message Low kl Registration Announcement Report to service desk amp Voice Selection Message textis Enabled Play preamble Specify text colour Specify text display mode 9 Delete Duplicate Figure 6 25 Text attributes for Courtes
298. time for the second NIC listed as Logical Net 2 Again note the QNX node number the logical network number 2 this time and the MAC address Repeat the above procedure for each node in the QNX network Record the information taking careful note of the node number that each MAC address is associated with At the end of this process there will be a record of two MAC addresses for each node in your proposed network Save this information for future use The netmap file Node 1 the first Q Host requires a file on it called etc config netmap Create this file by executing the command netmap etc config netmap A file will be created containing the MAC address information for the first node on the network This file must then be edited to add the MAC address information for all other nodes on the network After executing the above command the file contents will appear as follows Logical Lan Physical TX Count Last TX Fail Time 1 T 00DOC9 684 7 7 0 1 2 00DOC9 684A7D 0 Edit this file using vedit by executing the command vedit etc config netmap V4 0US September 2004 Page 209 MediaMatrix 22 ControlMatrix User s Guide Advanced Topics This will produce a display similar to the above The TX Count column Last TX Fail Time column and everything after the semicolon can be ignored and removed if desired Retain the semicolon and replace the number with a description of the host to which the entry belongs A series
299. tination zones and background source V4 0US September 2004 Page 105 MediaMatrix 22 ControlMatrix User s Guide ControlMatrix Console will be displayed for background events and zones and user input will be displayed for input assignment events The left side of the Preview page provides controls for filtering the type of event displayed in the preview event list The Event type drop down list facilitates display of events of a specific event type For example to display only background events select the Background event type from the Event type drop down list By default the Preview page shows events of any type the Any button is on Before you can select a specific event type deactivate the Any button by clicking once on the button This will enable the event type drop down list and allow a specific type to be selected Once the desired type has been selected click the Apply button to refresh the event list Now only events of the desired type will be displayed Click the Any button a second time to remove the filtering applied with the event type filter The Event Type drop down list will be deactivated in the process To filter out events that are not destined for a particular paging zone deactivate the Any button associated with the Paging Zone drop down list and then choose the particular zone of interest Only events destined for that zone will be displayed in the preview event list when the Apply button is pressed Filter c
300. tive host the automatic file update mechanism is defeated No file updates are made until a server is made active If power is lost to a host it will resume with the state it had prior to going down i e if it was idle it will restore to standby mode if active it will attempt to return to the active state The only exception to this is if the Active Host is powered down and while it is down the Standby Host is made active In this case when the downed host resumes it will attempt to become active will note that another host is active and assume the standby role until made active by the operator 12 6 2 Cobber Link A serial linking mechanism is provided so that each Q Host may be made aware of the state of the other This link is called Cobber Link to distinguish it from the similar concept Buddy Link on the MediaMatrix To enable this feature the two hosts must have a serial cable linking equivalent ports on the two machines This serial port is configured in ControlMatrix Setup A three wire null modem serial cable or a standard null modem cable with all connections may be used By using the Cobber Link and the alarms indicated on the Alarm Card an appropriately trained operator will be able to monitor the health of the two hosts decide which one should be active and make a change over if required While a Q Host is powered up it monitors its own health and generates a periodic serial stream out of the Cobber Link po
301. to 253 slaves and same slave addresses can be reused on different RS485 networks within the one system although a single continuous physical connection between RS485 devices is limited to 128 devices This means that CA485 devices connected to CABs on the same CobraNet network must have unique addresses Once a second CobraNet network exists within an installation the system designer has the option of using additional RS485 networks and hence duplicate CA485 addresses Device addresses may be chosen arbitrarily except that address 0 is invalid it is used for broadcast messages and address 1 is reserved for masters It is usual to assign address numbers consecutively from 2 upwards For ease of identification it is recommended that ranges of numbers be reserved for particular types of devices e g 2 20 may be all PCU devices 21 30 may be all SVC1 devices PCUs should be assigned the lowest numbers as CA485 collision resolution algorithms tend to slightly favor low number addresses CA485 devices automatically login to the master when certain conditions on the network are met The master transmits periodic heartbeat data that keeps the system alive permitting monitoring of network integrity All CA485 devices display their login status using a single LED on the device front panel 8 3 1 2 Setting SVC1 SVC2 SCP Devices CA485 Address Setup On the rear of the units is a set of 8 switches that allow the network address of th
302. to idle status If five seconds elapses without a Ptt button press the delayed announcement will be released for playback 9 8 2 5 Power No Network Indicator At the top of the panel to the right of center is a Power Network indicator For the PCUS to operate correctly this must be lit continuously If it is off the unit is not powered and if it is flashing it 1s not communicating with the Q Host or has not been correctly configured in the Q Host In this state the PCU will not respond to button presses Ensure that the indicator is lit continuously prior to using the PCUS 9 8 2 6 Hot Key Operation The PCUS s hot keys are located on the left hand side of the front panel These hot keys are used to recall a page code from memory making that page code active Pressing Ptt will trigger a paging event based on the recalled page code Recalling a Page Code Simply press and then release the hot key to recall its code If no page code has been programmed the page code will default to 000 blank The LED will light in the hot key for the duration in which it is held down If the page code is 000 then the LED will extinguish when the hot key is released Once a hot key is selected the PCUS will behave as if the page code has been entered from the keypad Programming a Hot Key To program a hot key continuously hold the desired key and only that key down for 3 seconds At first the hot key s LED will be lit solidly indicating that the
303. ton below the Remote Source folder The Mount Remote Folders dialog will appear Click the Connect to Remote host button so that the lamp illuminates with a bright green color Then enter the Computer NetBIOS name of the remote host in the text box provided If the remote computer is a Windows this name can be found by right clicking on the desktop Computer icon then selecting Properties and the Network Identification tab the name is listed as the Full computer name Older Windows PCs have the name in the Properties Identification tab under the desktop Network Neighborhood icon Next enter the IP address of the host Note this address must be in the same subnet as the Q Host see discussion on IP addresses in Section 5 3 Finally enter the name of the shared folder on the remote host then click the Done button Note sharing must be enabled for this folder on the remote PC If successful the shared folder will appear in the Remote Source Folder file list box To remove a shared folder from the Remote Source Folder file list box select it and then click the Disconnect button To gain access to a CD in the Q Host s CD drive click the New button At the top of the Mount Remote Folders dialog click the Connect to CD Drive button Make sure the CD is V4 0US September 2004 Page 108 MediaMatrix 22 ControlMatrix User s Guide ControlMatrix Console in the CD drive then click the Done button If successfu
304. trolMatrix Console happen live to the system they do not require a restart 4 1 10 Setting Input Levels To set input levels from PCUs Background sources and User Inputs first set the CABi Full Scale Sensitivity control set to 18dBu View File CABi device Next set up a MediaMatrix RMS meter on the desired input Apply the input signal and adjust the CAB Gain control View File CABi Device so that the meter reads approximately The gain structure of CAB8i devices differs from devices and hence the gain set up procedure differs for each device If using CAB8i inputs For PCU sources set the Mic Preamp switch View File to ON and the CAB Gain control to minimum 8dB fully counter clockwise For each other source e g Backgrounds set the CAB Gain control to produce a MediaMatrix meter reading of approximately OdB First try to do this with the Mic Preamp switch ON Only turn the Mic Preamp switch OFF if it is not possible to reduce the gain far enough using the rotary control If using CAB16i inputs For PCU sources set the CAB Gain control to 0dB For each other source e g Backgrounds set the CAB Gain control to produce a MediaMatrix meter reading of approximately OdB Note that PCUs have a nominal output level of OdBu for standard speech With CAB Gain set as above this level will typically produce a reading of 2dB on the MediaMatrix meter V4 0US September 2004 Page 34 MediaMatrix 22 ControlMat
305. ty The following sections address each of the fault conditions are how they can be addressed RATC comms is bad The RATC remote access terminal control communications to the MediaMatrix has failed The Q Host will no longer be able to control the MediaMatrix See the Section 10 3 2 1 The Q Host can t connect to the MediaMatrix have a miscellaneous RATC alarm Twelve miscellaneous alarms have been provided in the standard ControlMatrix View File for the MediaMatrix These can be linked to external CAB BOB inputs and used to indicate fault conditions of any kind a b c a b c d e a b An S560 MessageNet card is offline Make sure the 5560 MessageNet card 15 installed in the correct card slot in the host specified in the ControlMatrix Setup Network Devices dialog Make sure the host is powered up Check that the card is recognized by the PCI BIOS of the host into which it has been installed Also verify that it has been allocated a PCI index and an interrupt request number IRQ A network device is offline Make sure the device is powered up and operating correctly Check that the IP address of the device is correct Use the Network Devices dialog in ControlMatrix Setup If the device is not capable of remembering its IP address ensure that the Host will assign an IP address button has been checked and that the correct MAC address has been provided The device s IP address must be part the
306. uncement and the Ptt button 1s released the amber V4 0US September 2004 Page 156 MediaMatrix lt p ControlMatrix User s Guide Using Devices LED in the Ptt button will begin to flash and continue for five seconds During this period Cancel will be displayed on the LCD If the operator presses the Ptt button within this five second period the delayed announcement will be discarded and the system will return to idle status If five seconds elapses without a Ptt button press the delayed announcement will be released for playback 9 5 2 5 Power No Network Indicator At the top of the panel to the right of center is a Power Network indicator For the PCU2 to operate correctly this must be lit continuously If it is off the unit is not powered and if it is flashing it is not communicating with the Q Host or has not been correctly configured in the Q Host In this state the PCU will not respond to button presses Ensure that the indicator is lit continuously prior to using the PCU2 V4 0US September 2004 Page 157 MediaMatrix 22 ControlMatrix User s Guide Using Devices 9 6 Using a PCU3 Paging Station 9 6 1 Description Similar to PCUI the PCU3 is a paging station that permits an operator to initiate paging events involving one of four page codes An remote microphone may be associated with the PCU3 to provide and additional point of paging control At the PCU3 an operator can select a page code initiate
307. uratlon eese 72 5 13 3 Restore today s yesterday s this week s last week s last months 73 5 14 System MONU 74 5 14 1 Generate System Files innere contente entere ct nene eth orae ese 74 bat OT VES 74 5 14 3 Terminate 2 22 2 2 11 2 1 a A 74 54 4 Restart te 74 5 14 5 225 ve ea eeu 74 5 14 6 Switch to Wizard 74 S14 A mM wu Ste ces 74 DEAS LICENSES 75 5 14 9 System Preferences Announcement Replay After Emergency Interruption75 5 15 Help MONU Me 76 78 6 1 IE 79 6 1 1 To Console Tm 79 6 2 lc peter 80 6 2 1 Paging Station Configuration 80 6 2 2 Background Source Levels Dialog 44 88 6 2 3 Background Allocation 89 6 2 4 User Inputs
308. urday what is the 2 nition of the first week of the month for the purpose of the repetition selection section Every week of A6 The week is as it appears in the calendar display so if Saturday is the first day of the month the first week of that month is considered to be only 1 day long This also means that that month unless it is February will be considered to have 6 weeks Q7 I can set up a schedule which is obviously in error like picking a month which is outside the range of the run dates and I don t get a warning Why AT If the schedule is obviously in error the fault is considered obvious enough that a warning is unwarranted If the event is not corrected the obvious result is that it will never happen It is possible for the scheduler to produce very complex event patterns If a complete analysis were required after each entry the result would be an excessive slowing of the data entry process If you are trying to enter a complex event and want to check the validity of your entry use the Schedule Preview window to check the outcome 08 Why is it that if I set up an event press apply then edit the event name for next event set it up and press apply it overwrites my first event 8 You probably considering the event name to be like a name and the Apply button to be equivalent to Save As This is incorrect The events are being entered into a large table and the event name is just a
309. urrently sourcing the page code description from the ControlMatrix System It may appear for a brief period only Code Barred This display indicates that the code selected is not an Active Code for this PCU2 While the code may be defined as a Global Code it has not been allocated for use on this unit Undefined Code This display indicates that the code selected has not been defined in the ControlMatrix system Display Region 3 Status Text appearing in Region 3 indicates the status of the PCU2 the selection or the paging activity as follows Idle Indicates that the page code selected is defined and available for use by the PCU2 and that there are no busy zones in the selected code No Network Indicates that the PCU is not connected to a functioning CA485 network This display is accompanied by flashing of the Power No Network indicator The cause may be that there are no servers running on the Q Host the MediaMatrix and hence the local CAB is not configured correctly there is a cabling fault there is a hardware fault affecting communications or the PCU is not configured correctly in the Q Host Busy Each valid paging code facilitates a paging event to one or more zones This display indicates that at least one of the zones assigned to this PCU currently has paging activity from some other source but at a priority that would allow a page from this PCU to go out However the page from the other source would be lost to t
310. using 225 12 8 Telnet Access Paging Control 226 13 Glossar V4 0US September 2004 Page 6 MediaMatrix 22 ControlMatrix User s Guide Table of Contents V4 0US September 2004 Page 7 MediaMatrix ve 1 Overview of ControlMatrix MediaMatrix 22 ControlMatrix User s Guide Overview 1 1 Introduction ControlMatrix is Peavey s unique paging and messaging control system solution ControlMatrix combines both hardware and software elements to create a flexible best of breed system to meet the complex needs of mass transit and large venue users The system is comprised of several elements easy to use paging stations a number of specialized wall panel controllers a CobraNet PCI based messaging system and a comprehensive suite of software modules As a component of the Peavey MediaMatrix range this system provides a comprehensive paging solution with the following features Live paging pre recorded message release and message store and forward to busy zones Five levels of priority four assignable to paging events Comprehensive scheduling of messages backgrounds and user inputs Initiation of messages from external systems such as a Flight Information Display System FIDS Optional creation and control of courtesy announcements using text to speech technology Integration of electronic signage control for all types and sour
311. ve a problem with PCU and 10 3 9 6 I have a problem with a PCU1 in addition to the PCU3 specific items below The indicators in the event switches are doing a display sequence that could be described as scanning bouncing dot or display a This means the CA485 address is set to 0 It must be set to a unique number between 2 and 255 before the PCU3 can be used b The PCU3 is faulty and needs to be serviced V4 0US September 2004 Page 188 MediaMatrix lt p ControlMatrix User s Guide Debugging The busy indicator never goes off and I can t use the panel a Check that the microphone switch on the accompanying has not been locked by some means b The switch on the microphone is faulty or damaged c The microphone cable is damaged and needs to be repaired d Damaged faulty interconnecting control cable between PCU3 and the RMP1 PCU3 or is faulty and needs to be serviced At times I cannot make an event selection a Ifthe accompanying is using the PCU3 the busy indicator will be on and during this time it is not possible to alter the selection b There are some events for this station that are not configured in ControlMatrix Console c The PCU3 is offline Power Network LED is flashing see Section 10 3 7 10 CA485 device is offline At times I see the indicators status and or busy coming on and off or changing color without me touching the panel a Someon
312. vers in ControlMatrix Setup c Use the signal probe in the MediaMatrix View File to monitor the background source and ensure it is getting to the MediaMatrix correctly d Monitor the zone output to ascertain that the background audio is leaving the MediaMatrix 10 3 7 4 can t make a user input assignment a Use the signal probe in the MediaMatrix View File to monitor the user input to make sure audio from the input arrives at the MediaMatrix b Using the ControlMatrix Console System Alarms panel check that RATC comms GOOD appears under the Hardware tab If not then see 10 3 2 1 The Q Host can t connect to the MediaMatrix c Make sure you have started the servers in ControlMatrix Setup 10 3 7 5 zone level faders don t work or I get the GET PAGE LEVEL error a Using the ControlMatrix Console System Alarms panel check that RATC comms GOOD appears under the Hardware tab If not then see 10 3 2 1 The Q Host can t connect to the MediaMatrix b Make sure you have started the ControlMatrix servers in ControlMatrix Setup c Use the signal probe in the MediaMatrix View File to monitor the paging zone audio to make sure the audio is leaving the MediaMatrix 10 3 7 6 One of my scheduled events doesn t work a Make sure that particular event 15 not disabled in ControlMatrix Console b Make sure the Scheduler is not disabled in ControlMatrix Console c Check that the ControlMatrix servers have been started i
313. work Devices tab and check that the MessageNet card is on line Go to the Hardware tab and confirm that the Wave device and Wave players are on line If all of these are present the card is operational and ready for use 8 3 5 Setting up an AHCI Alarm Card For the purpose of accessing alarm inputs and outputs a Q Host may be fitted with an isolated digital I O card Installation of an alarm card requires an External Alarms Module software license To install this license see Section 5 2 V4 0US September 2004 Page 138 MediaMatrix 22 ControlMatrix User s Guide Installation Reference The AHCI Alarm Card supports eight inputs from eight external alarms and outputs to eight external alarm devices Inputs are via opto isolators and outputs are relay contacts Alarms may be configured within ControlMatrix Setup using the Alarm Manager dialog see Section 5 10 Installation e Carefully remove the AHCI Alarm Card from its anti static packaging while wearing an anti static wristband or similar grounding device Remove the cover of the Q Host e Find a free PCI card slot in the Q Host into which the card will fit Note that the first or lowest slot is reserved for an S560 MessageNet card if this slot is not occupied it is advisable to leave it vacant Carefully fit the AHCI to the host and refit the cover e Make the necessary external alarm connections to the AHCI Alarm Card using the pinout details provided below Setup e An AHCI Ala
314. y result depending on the priorities assigned to each paging event 2 6 1 If the second paging event is lower priority than the first If the second paging event is lower priority than the first the first will not be interrupted The result depends on the type of source that created the second paging event If the second paging event is a live page it will be routed to the store and forward system for later playback The priority of the stored message will be retained for use when the message is ultimately played out of the store and forward system to resolve any conflicts that may arise at that time If the second paging event is the assignment of a User Input the assignment will be made but no immediate change will be made to the routing to the zone When the original paging event completes the lower priority assignment may become active if it still current and no paging events of intermediate priority are current There is no involvement of the store and forward system for User Inputs If the second paging event is a message replay it will be delayed until the zone becomes available at that priority at which time the message will be played 2 6 2 If the second paging event is the same priority as the first If the second paging event is the same priority as the first the first will not be interrupted The result will depend on the type of source that created the second paging event and in some cases the type of source that created the f
315. y Sequence To enable text display while a courtesy sequence is played click the button on the Text Attributes pane so that the button label shows Enabled To display scrolling text on the display signs click the Scrolling button on the Text Attributes pane For fixed text click the Fixed button To display the text using red characters click the red button below the Specify text color label For green text click the green button For amber text click the amber button V4 0US September 2004 Page 114 ControlMatrix User s Guide ControlMatrix Console 6 6 3 Courtesy Preview amp Voice Pressing the Preview amp Voice tab provides a preview of the courtesy sequence and allows selection of the voice to be used for text to speech conversion A complete preview of the text contained in the sequence is displayed as it will appear on a sign Figure 6 26 illustrates an example Twenty minute arrival Countrylink wishes to advise passengers waiting at Courtesy Text Insertion that the XPT service to Sydney is expected to arrive in approximately 20 minutes Figure 6 26 Preview of a courtesy sequence and voice selection A range of text to speech voices is available and a voice should be chosen to match the voice used for the recorded messages used in the sequence Note that the voice chosen here is used only for the text insertion The voice can be selected from the Voice Selection drop down list as shown in Figure 6 26 Text
316. y and will restart for the next event at 00 00 so no minute spaced events will be lost Q3 I want to set up an event for weekends but there isn t an Every Weekend option on the list How do I do it A3 You can select more than one entry in anyone of the pick lists by holding the shift key while you click To select a weekend hold a shift key and click on Sunday and then Saturday Working days can similarly be selected by holding shift while you click Monday through Friday 04 What does the term every 2 even or every 2 odd mean V4 0US September 2004 Page 193 MediaMatrix lt p ControlMatrix User s Guide FAQs A4 Every 2 even means every 2 week on the even weeks Every 2 even therefore means in weeks 2 and 4 and every 2 odd means weeks 1 3 and 5 The 5 week will most likely become the next 1 week part way through There is a slight anomaly here in that if every 274 xxxx week of every month is selected the scheduler will start playing the event on the odd or even condition selected for the first month but then continue the event on every second week thereafter even if the extra days in some months progressively turn odd weeks to even or vice versa Q3 What is the definition of a week 5 The week is defined as from the midnight before Sunday morning 00 00 00 to the midnight after Saturday evening 23 59 59 09999 If the first day of the month is near the end of the week e g Sat
317. ystem along with the IP addresses for primary and redundant Q Hosts that can be used to access them An entry for the local system will appear by default IP addresses for the Q Hosts in this system are obtained from the Network Devices configuration see Network Devices Configuration Dialog Hosts from remote systems can also be added to the list of network devices using the Other IP Device type A text label in the upper right hand corner of the dialog box indicates whether the selected system is a local or remote one V4 0US September 2004 Page 50 ControlMatrix User s Guide ControlMatrix Console 10 21 1 51 MasterSystem BanquetHall Station3 Terminal2 LOCAL SYSTEM None None 10 10 21 1 124 V4 0US September 2004 ANCE Figure 5 8 Network System Interlinking configuration To add a new system to the list click the Add System button on the Network System Interlinking dialog Specify a System Name for the system by typing the name in the text box provided Be sure to confirm that this name is consistent with the name given to this particular system elsewhere It is mandatory to enter a Primary IP address for each system in the list Enter the Primary IP address by typing it into the textbox provided or by selecting the appropriate address from the Primary IP Address drop down list box If a redundant Q Host has been installed in the currently selected system enter its IP address in the Second
318. ystems will have two networks Setting up a system with more than two networks will require a good reason a firm resolve a stiff drink and some willing support see Section 12 4 5 addresses Understanding QNX networking requires an intimate knowledge of MAC addressing Every Ethernet device is created with a guaranteed unique 6 byte code that is generally represented as 12 hex digits To add a node to a QNX network it 1s necessary to know the MAC address of its Ethernet interface commonly known as a NIC for Network Interface Card even where it is not on a separate card V4 0US September 2004 Page 208 MediaMatrix 22 ControlMatrix User s Guide Advanced Topics To determine the MAC address of a network interface on a QNX node Login to the box as root Right click on the desktop and start a shell using the menu Execute the command netinfo L 1 Many lines of information will be displayed Look for a line that starts with the text Driver Slot Logical Net 1 This confirms that the information following pertains to the NIC on logical network 1 Approximately eight lines down will be a line starting with the text Physical Node ID The 12 hex digits here are the MAC address a written record of the ONX node number the logical network number and the address Repeat this process for the second NIC in the machine by executing the command netinfo L 2 The information will be repeated but this
319. zone speakers during a page from that paging station At the bottom of the panel there is a Power indicator In normal operation it is on continuously When this indicator is flashing it indicates that the unit is not connected to the RS485 network In this condition the volume of the speaker can still be changed manually but the unit will no longer receive paging information the SVC1 will not change level automatically on receipt of a page If an 5 is not powered or has lost power the default level to the speaker will be full volume so that any emergency announcements will still be heard V4 0US September 2004 Page 147 MediaMatrix 22 ControlMatrix User s Guide Using Devices 9 2 Using an SVC2 Volume Control Selector 9 2 1 Description SVC2 units are wall mounted devices similar to SVC1 devices They control the volume of one or more speakers directly associated with the unit and also provide source selection between four backgrounds A typical use is in stadium hospitality suites where occupants make a choice of background program or commentary language as well as volume control 9 2 2 Operation Although really one unit the SVC2 control surface is divided into two panels On the left panel are of four mutually exclusive buttons that allow selection of the background These background sources are configured in ControlMatrix Console Chapter 6 Red indicators within the buttons display the current selection The righ

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

Wildview TK30 Owner`s Manual  Manual Técnico Penta Jet Flex Híbrida - Rev3.indd  Workshop Manual Service  Samsung Samsung Nexus S™ Manuel de l'utilisateur  INSTEON 2242-xx2 User's Manual  Mon corps, mes droits... - Amnesty International France  - 22 - 第6 防除機 1 適用範囲 農薬を散布し病害虫や雑草の防除を行う  POCKETRAK C24 Reference Manual - NAUTA ricerca e consulenza  Téléchargez  

Copyright © All rights reserved. Failed to retrieve file